all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals | photos |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
User Manual 1 | Users Manual | 4.76 MiB | January 10 2020 / July 19 2020 | delayed release | ||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
User Manual 2 | Users Manual | 4.78 MiB | January 10 2020 / July 19 2020 | delayed release | ||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
User Manual 3 | Users Manual | 1.16 MiB | January 10 2020 / July 19 2020 | delayed release | ||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
User Manual Regulatory | Users Manual | 653.70 KiB | January 10 2020 / July 19 2020 | delayed release | ||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
UserMan Generic Safety 1 | Users Manual | 4.74 MiB | October 14 2020 / April 24 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
UserMan Generic Safety 2 | Users Manual | 1.53 MiB | October 14 2020 / April 24 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
UserMan Regulatory | Users Manual | 2.91 MiB | October 14 2020 / April 24 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
UserMan 1 | Users Manual | 5.18 MiB | October 14 2020 / April 24 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
UserMan 2 | Users Manual | 4.42 MiB | October 14 2020 / April 24 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Users Manual | Users Manual | 2.48 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Internal Photos | Internal Photos | 661.66 KiB | February 21 2022 / August 21 2022 | delayed release | ||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
External Photos | External Photos | 1.60 MiB | October 14 2020 / April 24 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Label Info | ID Label/Location Info | 605.93 KiB | October 14 2020 / October 26 2020 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 | BOM | Parts List/Tune Up Info | February 21 2022 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
CIIPC Declaration letter for | Cover Letter(s) | 321.10 KiB | February 21 2022 / February 22 2022 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Power of Attorney Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 8.14 KiB | February 21 2022 / February 22 2022 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Test Report Part 22 | Test Report | 1.13 MiB | February 21 2022 / February 22 2022 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Test Report Part 24 | Test Report | 1.00 MiB | February 21 2022 / February 22 2022 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Test Report Part 27-1 B7.38.41 | Test Report | 1.29 MiB | February 21 2022 / February 22 2022 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Test Report Part 27-2 B4.12.13.17.66 | Test Report | 1.85 MiB | February 21 2022 / February 22 2022 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Test Report Part 27 B30 | Test Report | 2.61 MiB | February 21 2022 / February 22 2022 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Test Report Part 90 B26 | Test Report | 752.90 KiB | February 21 2022 / February 22 2022 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Test Setup Photos | Test Setup Photos | 371.22 KiB | February 21 2022 / August 21 2022 | delayed release | ||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
confidentiality letter | Cover Letter(s) | 131.90 KiB | February 21 2022 / February 22 2022 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | October 14 2020 / October 26 2020 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Class II Permissive Change | Cover Letter(s) | 40.69 KiB | October 21 2020 / October 26 2020 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Confidentiality Request Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 48.76 KiB | October 21 2020 / October 26 2020 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 | Op Desc Ant Amphenol 1 | Operational Description | October 14 2020 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Op Desc Ant Amphenol 2 | Operational Description | October 14 2020 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Op Desc Ant Amphenol 3 | Operational Description | October 14 2020 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Op Desc Ant Amphenol 4 | Operational Description | October 14 2020 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Op Desc Ant Hong Bo 1 | Operational Description | October 14 2020 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Op Desc Ant Hong Bo 2 | Operational Description | October 14 2020 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Op Desc Ant Hong Bo 3 | Operational Description | October 14 2020 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Op Desc PwrReduct | Operational Description | October 14 2020 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Power of Attorney Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 74.78 KiB | October 14 2020 / October 26 2020 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
RF Exp | RF Exposure Info | 2.27 MiB | October 14 2020 / October 26 2020 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
RF Exp App A | RF Exposure Info | 664.70 KiB | October 14 2020 / October 26 2020 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
RF Exp App B | RF Exposure Info | 692.58 KiB | October 14 2020 / October 26 2020 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
RF Exp App C 1 | RF Exposure Info | 5.42 MiB | October 14 2020 / October 26 2020 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
RF Exp App C 2 | RF Exposure Info | 1.52 MiB | October 14 2020 / October 26 2020 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Tsup RFExp | Test Setup Photos | 110.66 KiB | October 14 2020 / April 24 2021 | delayed release | ||
1 2 3 4 5 | Tune Up Procedure | Parts List/Tune Up Info | October 14 2020 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Confidentiality Request | Cover Letter(s) | 204.64 KiB | January 10 2020 / January 21 2020 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 | L850-GL Operational Description | Operational Description | January 10 2020 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Label info (e-label) | Cover Letter(s) | 393.88 KiB | January 10 2020 / January 21 2020 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 | Operational Description Antenna spec Amphenol | Operational Description | January 10 2020 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Operational Description Antenna spec Speedwire | Operational Description | January 10 2020 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Operational Description Power Reduction | Operational Description | January 10 2020 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
RF Exposure Appendix A | RF Exposure Info | 1.27 MiB | January 10 2020 / January 21 2020 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
RF Exposure Appendix B | RF Exposure Info | 1.23 MiB | January 10 2020 / January 21 2020 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
RF Exposure Appendix C-1 | RF Exposure Info | 5.65 MiB | January 10 2020 / January 21 2020 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
RF Exposure Appendix C-2 | RF Exposure Info | 2.95 MiB | January 10 2020 / January 21 2020 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
RF Exposure Report | RF Exposure Info | 2.34 MiB | January 10 2020 / January 21 2020 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Test Setup Photos RF Exp | Test Setup Photos | 124.91 KiB | January 10 2020 / July 19 2020 | delayed release | ||
1 2 3 4 5 | ID Label/Location Info | October 06 2019 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Internal Photos | October 06 2019 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | October 06 2019 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) |
1 2 3 4 5 | User Manual 1 | Users Manual | 4.76 MiB | January 10 2020 / July 19 2020 | delayed release |
X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8 User Guide Read this first Before using this documentation and the product it supports, ensure that you read and understand the following:
Appendix A Important safety information on page 69 Safety and Warranty Guide Setup Guide First Edition (April 2020) Copyright Lenovo 2020. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant to a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-
35F-05925. Contents About this documentation . . . . . . . . iii Chapter 1. Meet your computer . . . . . 1
. . . 1 Front . . . Base . 3
. . . 4 Left
. . 6
. . Right . 8
. . Rear
. . . Bottom . . 9
. 10 Features and specifications . . 11
. . . . . . . . Statement on USB transfer rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connect to networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Lenovo Vantage . . Interact with your computer . . Chapter 2. Get started with your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
. 13 Get started with Windows 10 . 13 Windows account . . Windows user interface . . 14
. 15
. . Windows label
. 15
. . 15
. 15
. 16
. 16
. 17
. 18
. 20
. 21
. Connect to the wired Ethernet
. Connect to Wi-Fi networks. Connect to a cellular network. Use the keyboard shortcuts . Use the TrackPoint pointing device . Use the trackpad . Use the multi-touch screen (for selected models)
. Use the PrivacyGuard feature (for selected models)
. . Use the Intelligent Cooling feature . . Use multimedia . Use audio . . Connect to an external display . . 25
. 26
. 27
. 27
. 27
. . . . . . . . . . 23
. . . . . . . . . Get to know YOGA modes (for X1 Yoga Gen 5 only) Use ThinkPad Pen Pro (for X1 Yoga Gen 5 only)
. . . . . . 28
. 30
. . . . Chapter 3. Explore your computer . . 33
. 33 Manage power . 33
. 33
. 34
. 34
. 34
. 35
. 35
. . Check the battery status and temperature. . . Charge the computer . . Maximize the battery life
. Set power button behaviors . . . Set the power plan . . . Connect to a Bluetooth-enabled device. . . . . . Transfer data . . . . . Set up an NFC connection . . . Airplane mode . . . . 35
. 36 Chapter 4. Accessories . . . . . . . . 37
. . Purchase options . 37
. . 37
. Docking station . . 38
. Front view . 39
. . Rear view . . Attach a docking station. 40
. 41 Detach a docking station . . Connect multiple external displays
. 42
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Password types . Set, change, and remove a password . Chapter 5. Secure your computer and information . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
. 43 Lock the computer
. 43 Use passwords . 43
. 45
. Use Power Loss Protection function (for selected
. models) . Use the fingerprint reader (for selected models)
. Use face authentication (for selected models) . Use firewalls and antivirus programs. 46
. 46
. 47
. 47
. . . . . . . Chapter 6. Configure advanced settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
. 49 UEFI BIOS . 49
. 49
. 49
. 49
. 50
. 50
. 50
. . . . . What is UEFI BIOS . . . . Enter the UEFI BIOS menu . . Navigate in the UEFI BIOS interface . . . Change the startup sequence . . Set the system date and time. Update UEFI BIOS . . . . . . Recovery information . . Restore system files and settings to an earlier
. . point
. . Restore your files from a backup . . . Reset your computer . . Use advanced options . . Windows automatic recovery. . Create and use a recovery USB device . . 50
. 50
. 50
. 51
. 51
. 51
. 52 Install Windows 10 and drivers . . . . . Chapter 7. CRU replacement . . . . . 55
. . What are CRUs . 55
. 55 Disable Fast Startup and the built-in battery . 56
. . Replace a CRU . . 56
. . Base cover assembly . . . . . Copyright Lenovo 2020 i Wireless-WAN card (for selected models) . . . M.2 solid-state drive . Pen charger (for X1 Yoga Gen 5 only)
. . . . 57
. 59
. 61 Chapter 8. Help and support
. . Frequently asked questions . . . . . Error messages . . . Beep errors . . Self-help resources . . . . . . Call Lenovo . Before you contact Lenovo . . Lenovo Customer Support Center . . Purchase additional services. . . . . . 63
. 63
. 64
. 65
. 66
. 67
. 67
. 67
. 68
. . . . . . . . . Appendix A. Important safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Appendix B. Accessibility and ergonomic information . . . . . . . . 83 Appendix C. Supplemental information about the Linux operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Appendix D. Compliance information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Appendix E. Notices and trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 ii X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide About this documentation Illustrations in this documentation might look different from your product. Depending on the model, some optional accessories, features, and software programs might not be available on your computer. be applicable to your computer. Depending on the version of operating systems and programs, some user interface instructions might not Documentation content is subject to change without notice. Lenovo makes constant improvements on the documentation of your computer, including this User Guide. To get the latest documentation, go to https://
pcsupport.lenovo.com. Microsoft makes periodic feature changes to the Windows operating system through Windows Update. As a result, some information in this documentation might become outdated. Refer to Microsoft resources for the latest information. Copyright Lenovo 2020 iii iv X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Chapter 1. Meet your computer Front X1 Yoga Gen 5 X1 Carbon Gen 8 Copyright Lenovo 2020 1 1. Microphones Capture or record sound. Emit infrared (IR) light. 2. Infrared LED*
3. ThinkShutter 4. Camera with IR function*
(for selected models) on page 47. Note: Do not block the IR light-emitting diode (LED). Otherwise, the IR function might not work. Slide ThinkShutter to cover or uncover the camera lens. It is designed to protect your privacy. Take pictures or record videos by clicking Camera from the Start menu. The indicator next to the camera is on when the camera is in use. Log in to your computer with face authentication. See Use face authentication If you use other apps that support photographing, video chatting, and video conference, the camera starts automatically when you enable the camera-
required feature from the app. Take pictures or record videos by clicking Camera from the Start menu. The indicator next to the camera is on when the camera is in use. If you use other apps that support photographing, video chatting, and video conference, the camera starts automatically when you enable the camera-
required feature from the app. 6. Multi-touch screen*
Enable you to use your computer with simple touch gestures. See Use the multi-
touch screen (for selected models) on page 23. 5. Camera*
* for selected models 2 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Base X1 Yoga Gen 5 X1 Carbon Gen 8 1. Fingerprint reader Log in to your computer with enrolled fingerprints. See Use the fingerprint reader
(for selected models) on page 46. 2. NFC mark*
3. Trackpad Your computer supports NFC (near field communication). You can share information with another NFC-enabled device. See Set up an NFC connection on page 35. Perform finger touch and all the functions of a traditional mouse. See Use the trackpad on page 21. 4. TrackPoint pointing device Perform all the functions of a traditional mouse. See Use the TrackPoint pointing device on page 20. 5. Speakers Enable you to experience high-quality sound.
* for selected models Chapter 1. Meet your computer 3 Left Charge USB-C compatible devices with the output voltage and current of 5 V Charge your computer. and 1.5 A. Transfer data:
Thunderbolt 3 speed, up to 40 Gbps (when the device connected is Thunderbolt 3 compatible ) USB 3.2 Gen 2 speed, up to 10 Gbps (when the device connected is not Thunderbolt 3 compatible) Connect to an external display:
USB-C to VGA: 1920 x 1200 pixels, 60 Hz USB-C to DP: 3840 x 2160 pixels, 60 Hz Connect to USB-C accessories to help expand your computer functionality. To purchase USB-C accessories, go to https://www.lenovo.com/accessories. Supply power to another computer using P-to-P (Peer to Peer) 2.0 charging function. See Use P-to-P 2.0 charging function on page 33. Notes:
When the battery power is below 10%, the connected USB-C accessories might not work correctly. If your computer supports wireless wide area network (WAN) and Global Positioning System (GPS) functions, the USB device or Thunderbolt 3 device connected to the Thunderbolt 3 connectors might influence these functions. If your computer cannot establish wireless WAN communications, or if your location cannot be pinpointed through the GPS function of your computer, detach the device from the Thunderbolt 3 connectors. Make your computer thinner than the ones with a standard Ethernet connector. Use a ThinkPad Ethernet Extension Adapter Gen 2 to connect your computer to a local area network (LAN) through this connector. The ThinkPad Ethernet Extension Adapter Gen 2 is available as an option and shipped with some computer models only. You can purchase a ThinkPad Ethernet Extension Adapter Gen 2 from Lenovo at: https://www.lenovo.com/accessories. 1. Thunderbolt 3 connectors
(USB-C) 2. Ethernet extension connector Gen 2 4 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Connect the computer to one of the following supported docks to extend the computer capabilities:
3. Docking-station connector ThinkPad Basic Docking Station ThinkPad Pro Docking Station ThinkPad Ultra Docking Station 4. USB 3.2 connector Gen 1 Connect a USB-compatible device, such as a USB keyboard, USB mouse, USB storage device, or USB printer. Note: If your computer supports wireless wide area network (WAN) and Global Positioning System (GPS) functions, the USB device connected to the USB 3.2 connector Gen 1 might influence these functions. If your computer cannot establish wireless WAN communications, or if your location cannot be pinpointed through the GPS function of your computer, detach the device from the USB 3.2 connector Gen 1. 5. HDMI connector Connect to a compatible digital audio device or video monitor, such as an HDTV. Connect headphones with a 3.5-mm (0.14-inch) and 4-pole plug to listen to the sound from the computer. 6. Audio connector Connect a headset with a 3.5-mm (0.14-inch) and 4-pole plug to listen to the sound from the computer or talk with others. Note: This connector does not support standalone external microphones. Chapter 1. Meet your computer 5 Right X1 Yoga Gen 5 X1 Carbon Gen 8 1. ThinkPad Pen Pro See Use ThinkPad Pen Pro (for X1 Yoga Gen 5 only) on page 30. Press to turn on the computer or put the computer to sleep mode. To turn off the computer, open the Start menu, click Power, and then select Shut down. 2. Power button The indicator in the power button shows the system status of your computer. Blinking for three times: The computer is initially connected to power. On: The computer is on. Off: The computer is off or in hibernation mode. Blinking rapidly: The computer is entering sleep or hibernation mode. Blinking slowly: The computer is in sleep mode. 6 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide 3. Always On USB 3.2 connector Gen 1 With the Always On USB feature enabled, the Always On USB 3.2 connector Gen 1 can charge a USB-compatible device when the computer is on, off, in sleep mode, or in hibernation mode. Notes:
By default, Always On USB is enabled and Charge in Battery Mode is disabled in UEFI BIOS. When the computer is off or in hibernation mode, and Charge in Battery Mode is disabled in UEFI BIOS, ensure that you have connected the computer to ac power. To enable the Always On USB feature:
1. Enter the UEFI BIOS menu. See Enter the UEFI BIOS menu on page 49. 2. Click Config USB Always On USB to enable the Always On USB feature. Note: If your computer supports wireless wide area network (WAN) and Global Positioning System (GPS) functions, the USB device connected to the Always On USB 3.2 connector Gen 1 might influence these functions. If your computer cannot establish wireless WAN communications, or if your location cannot be pinpointed through the GPS function of your computer, detach the device from the Always On USB 3.2 connector Gen 1. 4. Mini security-lock slot Lock your computer to a desk, table, or other fixtures through a compatible security cable lock. See Lock the computer on page 43 . Chapter 1. Meet your computer 7 Rear X1 Yoga Gen 5 X1 Carbon Gen 8 1. System status indicator On: The computer is on. The indicator in the ThinkPad logo on the computer lid shows the system status of your computer. Blinking for three times: The computer is initially connected to power. Off: The computer is off or in hibernation mode. Blinking rapidly: The computer is entering sleep or hibernation mode. Blinking slowly: The computer is in sleep mode. 2. Nano-SIM-card tray*
Use the Nano Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card to connect to a wireless-WAN network. See Connect to a cellular network on page 16.
* for selected models 8 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Bottom 1. Emergency-reset hole If the computer stops responding and you cannot turn it off by pressing the power button, reset your computer:
1. Disconnect your computer from ac power. 2. Insert a straightened paper clip into the hole to cut off power supply temporarily. 3. Connect your computer to ac power and then turn on your computer. 2. Docking-station hook holes Use the docking-station hook holes to secure a supported docking station. 3. Speakers Enable you to experience high-quality sound. Chapter 1. Meet your computer 9 Features and specifications X1 Yoga Gen 5:
Width: 322.9 mm (12.7 inches) Depth: 218.1 mm (8.6 inches) Thickness: 15.5 mm (0.61 inches) X1 Carbon Gen 8:
Width: 323.5 mm (12.7 inches) Depth: 217.1 mm (8.5 inches) Thickness: 14.9 mm (0.59 inches) Maximum heat output
(depending on the model) 45 W (154 Btu/hr) 65 W (222 Btu/hr) Power source (ac power adapter) Sine-wave input at 50 Hz to 60 Hz Input rating of the ac power adapter: 100 V to 240 V ac, 50 Hz to 60 Hz To view the microprocessor information of your computer, right-click the Start button and then click System. Low power double data rate 3 (LPDDR3) memory module, soldered on the system board, up to 16 GB M.2 solid-state drive*
Hybrid solid-state drive* (with Intel Optane memory) Brightness control Color display with In-Plane Switching (IPS) technology Display size: 355.6 mm (14 inches) Display Display resolution: 1920 x 1080 pixels, 2560 x 1440 pixels, or 3840 x 2160 pixels Intel UHD Graphics Multi-touch technology*
Privacy Guard feature*
Function keys Six-row keyboard with backlight Trackpad TrackPoint pointing device Audio connector Ethernet extension connector Gen 2 HDMI connector Nano-SIM-card tray*
Gen 1) Two Thunderbolt 3 connectors (USB-C) Two USB 3.2 connectors Gen 1 (including one Always On USB 3.2 connector Dimensions Microprocessor Memory Storage device Keyboard Connectors and slots 10 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Global Positioning System (GPS) satellite receiver (available on models with Wireless features Near filed communication (NFC)*
Security features Face authentication*
Fingerprint reader Mini security-lock slot Password Trusted Platform Module (TPM)*
Bluetooth wireless WAN)*
Proximity sensor*
Wireless LAN Wireless WAN*
Camera Microphones Others
* for selected models Statement on USB transfer rate Depending on many factors such as the processing capability of the host and peripheral devices, file attributes, and other factors related to system configuration and operating environments, the actual transfer rate using the various USB connectors on this device will vary and will be slower than the data rate listed below for each corresponding device. USB device 3.2 Gen 1 / 3.1 Gen 1 3.2 Gen 2 / 3.1 Gen 2 3.2 Gen 2 2 Data rate (Gbit/s) 5 10 20 Chapter 1. Meet your computer 11 12 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Chapter 2. Get started with your computer Get started with Windows 10 Learn the basics of Windows 10 and start working with it right away. For more information about Windows 10, see the Windows help information. A user account is required to use the Windows operating system. It can either be a Windows user account or a Microsoft account. Windows account Windows user account When you start Windows for the first time, you are prompted to create a Windows user account. This first account you created is of the Administrator type. With an Administrator account, you can create additional user accounts or change account types by doing the following:
1. Open the Start menu and select Settings Accounts Family & other users. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. Microsoft account You can also log in to the Windows operating system with a Microsoft account. To create a Microsoft account, go to the Microsoft sign-up page at https://signup.live.com and follow the on-
screen instructions. Enjoy one-time signing in if you are using other Microsoft services, such as OneDrive, Skype, and Outlook. With a Microsoft account, you can:
com. Sync personalized settings across other Windows-based devices. Copyright Lenovo 2020 13 Windows user interface 1. Account 2. Documents 3. Pictures 4. Settings 5. Power Change account settings, lock the computer, or sign out from the current account. Open the Documents folder, a default folder to save your received files. Open the Pictures folder, a default folder to save your received pictures. Launch Settings. Shut down, restart, or put the computer into sleep mode. 6. Start button Open the Start menu. 7. Windows Search 8. Task View Type what you are looking for in the search box and get search results from your computer and the Web. Display all opened apps and switch among them. 9. Windows notification area Display notifications and status of some features. 10. Battery status icon Display power status and change battery or power settings. When your computer is not connected to ac power, the icon changes to
. Connect to an available wireless network and display the network status. When connected to a wired network, the icon changes to
. Display the latest notifications from apps and provide quick access to some features. 11. Network icon 12. Action center Open the Start menu Click the Start button. Access Control Panel Press the Windows logo key on the keyboard. Open the Start menu and click Windows System Control Panel. 14 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Open the Start menu and select the app you want to launch. Use Windows Search. Launch an app Use Windows Search. Windows label Your computer might have a Windows 10 Genuine Microsoft label affixed to its cover depending on the following factors:
Your geographic location Edition of Windows 10 that is preinstalled Go to https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/howtotell/Hardware.aspx for illustrations of the various types of Genuine Microsoft labels. In the Peoples Republic of China, the Genuine Microsoft label is required on all computer models preinstalled with any version of Windows 10. In other countries and regions, the Genuine Microsoft label is required only on computer models licensed for Windows 10 Pro. The absence of a Genuine Microsoft label does not indicate that the preinstalled Windows version is not genuine. For details on how to tell whether your preinstalled Windows product is genuine, refer to the information provided by Microsoft at https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/howtotell/default.aspx. There are no external, visual indicators of the Product ID or Windows version for which the computer is licensed. Instead, the Product ID is recorded in the computer firmware. Whenever a Windows 10 product is installed, the installation program checks the computer firmware for a valid, matching Product ID to complete the activation. In some cases, an earlier Windows version might be preinstalled under the terms of the Windows 10 Pro license downgrade rights. Connect to networks Your computer helps you connect to the world through a wired or wireless network. Connect to the wired Ethernet Connect your computer to a local network through the Ethernet extension connector Gen 2 on your computer with a ThinkPad Ethernet Extension Adapter Gen 2. The Ethernet extension adapter is available as an option and shipped with some computer models. You can purchase one from Lenovo at https://www.lenovo.com/accessories. Connect to Wi-Fi networks 1. Click the network icon in the Windows notification area. A list of available wireless networks is displayed. 2. Select a network available for connection. Provide required information, if needed. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 15 Connect to a cellular network If your computer has a wireless wide area network (WAN) card and a nano-SIM card installed, you can connect to a cellular data network and get online using the cellular signal. Note: The cellular service is provided by authorized mobile service carriers in some countries or regions. You must have a cellular plan from a service carrier to connect to the cellular network. To establish a cellular connection:
1. Locate the nano-SIM-card slot. 2. Install a nano-SIM card into the slot:
a. Insert a straightened paper clip into the hole in the tray and the tray ejects. b. Install a new nano-SIM card into the tray with the metal contacts facing downward. c. Insert the tray into the nano-SIM-card slot until you hear a click. 3. Click the network icon in the Windows notification area, and then select the cellular network icon from the list. 4. Provide required information if needed. Use Lenovo Vantage The preinstalled Lenovo Vantage is a customized one-stop solution to help you maintain your computer with automated updates and fixes, configure hardware settings, and get personalized support. Access Lenovo Vantage Open the Start menu and click Lenovo Vantage. You also can type Lenovo Vantage in the search box. To download the latest version of Lenovo Vantage, go to Microsoft Store and search by the app name. Key features Lenovo Vantage enables you to:
Know the device status easily and customize device settings. Download and install UEFI BIOS, firmware, and driver updates to keep your computer up-to-date. Monitor your computer health, and secure your computer against outside threats. Look up warranty status (online). 16 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Access User Guide and helpful articles. Notes:
The available features vary depending on the computer model. Lenovo Vantage makes periodic updates of the features to keep improving your experience with your computer. The description of features might be different from that on your actual user interface. Interact with your computer Your computer provides you various ways to navigate the screen. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 17 Use the keyboard shortcuts The special keys on the keyboard help you work more easily and effectively. 1. Windows logo key 2. Caps Lock key Open the Start menu. For information about using this key with other keys, see the Windows help information. Switch the letter case between the upper case and lower case. When the key indicator is on, you can type uppercase letters. Invoke the special function printed as an icon on each key or standard function. 3. F1F12 function keys To choose whether to invoke the special function or standard function:
1. Go to Control Panel and view by Large icons or Small icons. 2. Click Keyboard or Lenovo - Keyboard Manager and select the option of your preference. Switch the function of the F1F12 keys between the standard function and special function printed as an icon on each key. When the Fn Lock indicator is on:
Press F1-F12 to use the standard function. Press Fn+F1-F12 to use the special function. When the Fn Lock indicator is off:
Press Fn+F1-F12 to use the standard function. Press F1-F12 to use the special function. Mute or unmute the speakers. When the key indicator is on, the speakers are muted. If you mute the speakers and turn off your computer, the speakers remain muted when you turn on your computer. Volume down. Volume up. 18 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Mute or unmute the microphones. When the key indicator is on, the microphones are muted. Brightness down. Brightness up. Manage external displays. Wireless on / wireless off. Expand or collapse the notification center. Answer incoming calls. This function only works with some apps, such as Skype for Business 2016 and Microsoft Teams 1.0. By default, the function works with Skype for Business 2016. You can change the default setting on Lenovo Vantage. Decline incoming calls. This function only works with some apps, such as Skype for Business 2016 and Microsoft Teams 1.0. By default, the function works with Skype for Business 2016. You can change the default setting on Lenovo Vantage. Note: You can also press F11 to hang up ongoing calls on Skype for Business 2016. Invoke the function defined by yourself. Open Lenovo Vantage,and you can define different functions for the F12 key. Open the Snipping Tool program. Equal the Break key on a conventional external keyboard. Equal the ScrLK or Scroll Lock key on a conventional external keyboard. Equal the Pause key on a conventional external keyboard. Equal the SysRq key on a conventional external keyboard. Put the computer to sleep mode. To wake up the computer, press Fn or the power button. If your computer supports the Privacy Guard feature, press Fn+D to enable or disable this feature. For more information, see Use face authentication (for selected models) on page 47. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 19 Fn+Spacebar Switch between different keyboard backlight statuses if your computer supports keyboard backlight. Fn+B Fn+K Fn+P Fn+S Fn+4 Fn+D Fn+Left arrow key Equal the Home key. Fn+Right arrow key Equal the End key. Use the TrackPoint pointing device The TrackPoint pointing device enables you to perform all the functions of a traditional mouse, such as pointing, clicking, and scrolling. Use the TrackPoint pointing device Use your index finger or middle finger to apply pressure to the pointing-stick nonslip cap in any direction parallel to the keyboard. The pointer on the screen moves accordingly but the pointing stick itself does not move. The higher the pressure applied, the faster the pointer moves. 1. Pointing stick 2. Left-click button Press to select or open an item. 3. Right-click button Press to display a shortcut menu. 4. Middle button Press and hold the dotted middle button while applying pressure to the pointing stick in the vertical or horizontal direction. Then, you can scroll through the document, Web site, or apps. Disable the TrackPoint pointing device The TrackPoint pointing device is active by default. To disable the device:
1. Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Devices Mouse. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions to disable TrackPoint. 20 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Replace the pointing-stick nonslip cap Note: Ensure that the new cap has grooves a . The entire trackpad surface is sensitive to finger touch and movement. You can use the trackpad to perform all the pointing, clicking, and scrolling functions of a traditional mouse. Use the trackpad Use the trackpad 1. Left-click zone Press to select or open an item. 2. Right-click zone Press to display a shortcut menu. You also can tap anywhere on the surface of the trackpad with one finger to perform the left-click action. You also can tap anywhere on the surface of the trackpad with two fingers to perform the right-click action. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 21 Use the touch gestures Tap Tap anywhere on the trackpad with one finger to select or open an item. Two-finger tap Tap anywhere on the trackpad with two fingers to display a shortcut menu. Two-finger scroll Put two fingers on the trackpad and move them in the vertical or horizontal direction. This action enables you to scroll through the document, Web site, or apps. Two-finger zoom out Put two fingers on the trackpad and move them closer together to zoom out. Two-finger zoom in Put two fingers on the trackpad and move them farther apart to zoom in. Swipe three fingers up Put three fingers on the trackpad and move them up to open the task view to see all your open windows. Swipe three fingers down Put three fingers on the trackpad and move them down to show the desktop. 22 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Notes:
When using two or more fingers, ensure that you position your fingers slightly apart. Some gestures are not available if the last action was done from the TrackPoint pointing device. Some gestures are only available when you are using certain apps. If the trackpad surface is stained with oil, turn off the computer first. Then, gently wipe the trackpad surface with a soft and lint-free cloth moistened with lukewarm water or computer cleaner. For more gestures, see the help information of the pointing device. Disable the trackpad The trackpad is active by default. To disable the device:
1. Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Devices Touchpad. 2. In the Touchpad section, turn off the Touchpad control. Use the multi-touch screen (for selected models) If your computer display supports the multi-touch function, you can navigate the screen with simple touch gestures. Note: Some gestures might not be available depending on the app you use. Tap once From the Start menu: Open an app or item. From the desktop: Select an app or item. In an open app: Perform an action such as Copy, Save, and Delete, depending on the app. Tap twice quickly Open an app or item from the desktop. Tap and hold Open a shortcut menu. Slide Scroll through items, such as lists, pages, and photos. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 23 Drag an item to the location you want Move an object. Move two fingers closer together Zoom out. Move two fingers farther apart Zoom in. Swipe in from the right edge Open the action center to see your notifications and quick actions. Swipe in from the left edge View all your open windows in task view. Swipe downwards shortly from the top edge (for full-screened app or when your computer is in the tablet mode) Swipe in from the top edge to the bottom edge (when your Show a hidden title bar. computer is in the tablet mode) Close the current app. Tips Turn off the computer before cleaning the multi-touch screen. Use a dry, soft, and lint-free cloth or a piece of absorbent cotton to remove fingerprints or dust from the multi-touch screen. Do not apply solvents to the cloth. The multi-touch screen is a glass panel covered with a plastic film. Do not apply pressure or place any metallic object on the screen, which might damage the touch panel or cause it to malfunction. 24 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Do not use fingernails, gloved fingers, or inanimate objects for input on the screen. Regularly calibrate the accuracy of the finger input to avoid a discrepancy. Use the PrivacyGuard feature (for selected models) Depending on the model, your computer might support the PrivacyGuard feature. The PrivacyGuard feature prevents others from peeking at your screen to protect your privacy whenever needed. When the feature is enabled, it darkens the screen and narrows the viewing angle. The effective direction of the PrivacyGuard feature varies depending on your screen direction. If you use the screen in landscape mode, the feature is effective with horizontal angles. If you use the screen in portrait mode, the feature is effective with vertical angles. People can see the screen contents. People can hardly see the screen contents. PrivacyGuard disabled PrivacyGuard enabled and screen in PrivacyGuard enabled and screen in landscape mode portrait mode Note: The privacy level of this feature varies depending on the screen brightness level, the contrast ratio, and the physical environment where you are using this feature. By default, the PrivacyGuard feature is disabled. You can press Fn+D to enable it. You will be prompted by the on-screen display every time the feature is enabled or disabled. Automatic PrivacyGuard feature for passwords Note: The automatic PrivacyGuard feature for passwords is not supported on computers with the Linux operating system. The PrivacyGuard feature is turned on automatically when you are required to input passwords for password-protected objects, such as encrypted documents, or applications and Web sites that need password authentication. By default, the automatic PrivacyGuard feature for passwords is disabled. You can open Lenovo Vantage to enable it. Tips on using the PrivacyGuard feature To increase privacy level, press until the desired level is achieved. This is useful in darker To decrease privacy level, press until the desired level is achieved. This is useful in brighter environments. environments. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 25 Use the Intelligent Cooling feature Intelligent cooling feature helps you adjust fan speed, computer temperature and performance. This feature works in auto mode by default. Press Fn+T to switch between manual mode and auto mode. When in manual mode The Intelligent Cooling feature enables your computer to work in the following three modes:
Quiet mode
: Your computer works with the least fan noise. Balanced mode
: Your computer works with balanced performance and noise. Performance mode
: Your computer works with the highest performance and normal noise. When in auto mode the amount of system activity. Auto battery mode enables your computer to switch between quite mode or battery mode based on Auto performance mode enables your computer to switch between quite mode, balanced mode or performance mode based on the amount of system activity. on ac power on battery power For computer models installed with Linux operating system, the computer always starts up in performance mode by default without power slider bar for selection. Do the following to switch to the preferred mode:
Press Fn+L to switch to quiet mode. Press Fn+M to switch to balanced mode. Press Fn+H to switch to performance mode. When in auto mode:
The Intelligent Cooling feature enables your computer to work in the following two modes automatically:
Auto battery mode
: Your computer is automatically adjusted to quite mode or battery mode based on the amount of system activity. Auto performance mode
: Your computer is automatically adjusted to quite mode, balanced mode or performance mode based on the amount of system activity. on ac power on battery power Note: The computer models installed with Linux operating system does not support the auto mode of Intelligent Cooling feature. 26 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Use your computer for business or entertainment with the built-in components (camera, speakers, and audio features) or connected external devices (an external projector, monitor, and HDTV). To enhance your audio experience, connect speakers, headphones, or a headset with a 3.5-mm (0.14-inch), 4-pole plug to the audio connector. Use multimedia Use audio Adjust the speaker volume Press to increase the speaker volume or press to decrease the speaker volume. Change the sound settings 1. Go to Control Panel and view by category. 2. Click Hardware and Sound Sound. 3. Change the settings as you prefer. Connect to an external display Connect your computer to a projector or a monitor to give presentations or expand your workspace. Connect to a wired display 1. Connect the external display to an appropriate video connector on your computer, such as the HDMI connector or either of the Thunderbolt 3 connectors (USB-C). 2. Connect the external display to an electrical outlet. 3. Turn on the external display. If your computer cannot detect the external display, right-click a blank area on the desktop, and then click Display settings Detect. Supported resolution The following table lists the supported maximum resolution of the external display. Connect the external display to Supported resolution the Thunderbolt 3 connector (USB-C) Up to 4096 x 2304 pixels / 60 Hz the HDMI connector Up to 4096 x 2160 pixels / 30 Hz Connect to a wireless display To use a wireless display, ensure that both your computer and the external display support the Miracast feature. Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Devices Bluetooth & other devices Add Bluetooth or other device. In the Add a device window, click Wireless display or dock. Then, follow the instructions on the screen. Click the action center icon in the Windows notification area and click Connect. Select the wireless display and follow the on-screen instructions. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 27 Set the display mode Press or and then select a display mode of your preference. PC screen only: Displays the video output only on your computer screen. Note: Depending on the situation, you might see Disconnect, PC screen only, Computer only, or Disconnect projector. Duplicate: Displays the same video output on both your computer screen and an external display. Extend: Extends the video output from your computer display to an external display. You can drag and move items between the two displays. Second screen only: Displays the video output only on an external display. Note: Depending on the situation, you might see Projector only or Second screen only. If you show programs using DirectDraw or Direct3D in full-screen mode, only the main display shows the video output. Change display settings 1. Right-click a blank area on the desktop and select Display settings. 2. Select the display that you want to configure. 3. Change display settings of your preference. You can change the settings for both the computer display and the external display. For example, you can define which one is the main display and which one is the secondary display. You also can change the resolution and orientation. Note: If you set a higher resolution for the computer display than the external display, only part of the screen can be displayed on the external display. Get to know YOGA modes (for X1 Yoga Gen 5 only) Your computer display can be rotated to any angle up to 360 degrees. 28 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Attention: Do not rotate the computer display with too much force, or apply too much force to the upper-
right or upper-left corner of the computer display. Otherwise, the computer display or hinges might get damaged. Your computer features the following four YOGA modes. You can switch among different modes according to your preference. Note: The keyboard and the pointing devices are automatically disabled in the stand mode, tent mode, and tablet mode. Use the touch screen to control your computer instead. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 29 Notebook mode Stand mode Tent mode Tablet mode Use ThinkPad Pen Pro (for X1 Yoga Gen 5 only) The ThinkPad Pen Pro is an electronic pen stored in the pen slot. To use the pen, slide it out of the slot. Notes:
The ThinkPad Pen Pro is not waterproof. Keep the pen away from water and excessive moisture. 30 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide To purchase the ThinkPad Pen Pro, go to https://www.lenovo.com/accessories. Use the ThinkPad Pen Pro 1 Eraser button 2 Click button You can perform the following operations with the ThinkPad Pen Pro:
To click or make a selection, tap the display once. To double-click, tap twice without pausing. To right-click, tap the display and hold the pen there for one second. Alternatively, you can press and hold the click button 2 and tap the display. To erase ink, press and hold the eraser button 1 , tap the display, and drag the pen across the ink you want to erase. Charge the ThinkPad Pen Pro 1. Ensure that your computer is on or in sleep mode. 2. Insert the pen back into the pen slot. The pen is 80% charged in about 15 seconds and 100% charged in about five minutes. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 31 32 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Chapter 3. Explore your computer Manage power Check the battery status and temperature Use the information in this section to achieve the best balance between performance and power efficiency. The battery status icon battery status, view the current power plan, change the power mode, and access battery settings quickly. is in the Windows notification area. You can click the icon to check the or Open Lenovo Vantage, and then follow the on-screen instructions to view battery details. Check the battery status Check the battery temperature Charge the computer Use ac power When the battery power is low, charge your battery by connecting your computer to ac power. The battery is fully charged in about four to eight hours. If the power adapter shipped with your computer supports the rapid charge function, the battery is 80% charged in about one hour when the computer is turned off. The actual charging time depends on the battery size, the physical environment, and whether you are using the computer. Battery charging is also affected by the battery temperature. The recommended battery temperature range for charging the battery is between 10C (50F) and 35C (95F). Note: To maximize the life of the battery, the computer does not recharge the battery if the remaining power is greater than 95%. Use P-to-P 2.0 charging function Both Thunderbolt 3 connectors (USB-C) on the computer feature the Lenovo-unique P-to-P 2.0 charging function. When no ac power is available, this feature enables one computer to supply power to another computer through a USB-C to USB-C cable. When ac power is available for only one computer, this feature enables both computers to get charged by ac power. Before using the function, ensure that:
The selected connectors support the P-to-P 2.0 charging function and power delivery function. Always On USB and Charge in Battery Mode are enabled in UEFI BIOS of both computers, so that the function works even when the computers are off or in hibernation mode. To enable Always On USB and Charge in Battery Mode:
1. Enter the UEFI BIOS menu. See Enter the UEFI BIOS menu on page 49. 2. Click Config USB to enable Always On USB and Charge in Battery Mode. To use the function:
When no ac power is available:
Copyright Lenovo 2020 33 The remaining battery power of computer A should be at least 30% and be 3% higher than that of computer B. To check the battery status, see Check the battery status and temperature on page 33. Connect the computers to each other with a USB-C to USB-C cable. In this situation, computer A works as the power supply. Once the remaining battery power of computer A is lower than 30%, computer A stops supplying power to computer B. When ac power is available:
Connect the computers to each other with a USB-C to USB-C cable. Connect one computer to ac power. In this situation, ac power works as the power supply and both computers get charged. Note: The actual charging speed using the Lenovo-unique P-to-P 2.0 charging function varies depending on many factors, such as the remaining battery power of the computers, the wattage of the ac power adapter, and whether you are using the computers. Maximize the battery life Lower the brightness of the computer display. Turn off the wireless features when not in use. Use the battery until the charge is depleted. Recharge the battery completely before using it. Set power button behaviors You can define what the power button does according to your preference. For example, by pressing the power button, you can turn off the computer or put the computer to sleep or hibernation mode. To change what the power button does:
1. Right-click the battery status icon in the Windows notification area. 2. Click Power Options Choose what the power buttons do. 3. Change the settings as you prefer. Set the power plan For ENERGY STAR compliant computers, the following power plan takes effect when your computers have been idle for a specified duration:
34 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Table 1. Default power plan (when plugged into ac power) Turn off the display: After 10 minutes Put the computer to sleep: After 30 minutes To reset the power plan to achieve the best balance between performance and power saving:
1. Right-click the battery status icon and select Power Options. 2. Choose or customize a power plan of your preference. Transfer data Quickly share your files using the built-in Bluetooth or NFC technology among devices with the same features. Connect to a Bluetooth-enabled device You can connect all types of Bluetooth-enabled devices to your computer, such as a keyboard, a mouse, a smartphone, or speakers. To ensure the connection is successful, place the devices 10 meters (33 feet), at most, from the computer. 1. Turn on Bluetooth on the computer. Click the action center icon in the Windows notification area. Enable the Bluetooth feature. Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Devices Bluetooth & other devices. Turn on the Bluetooth switch. 2. Click Add Bluetooth or other device Bluetooth. 3. Select a Bluetooth device, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Your Bluetooth-enabled device and computer will automatically connect the next time if the two devices are in range of each other with Bluetooth turned on. You can use Bluetooth for data transfer or remote control and communication. Set up an NFC connection If your computer supports NFC, you will see an NFC mark or label around the trackpad area. NFC is a high-frequency and short-range wireless communication technology. By using NFC, you can simply tap and connect your computer and another NFC-enabled device over a few centimeters or inches. 1. Open the Start menu and click Settings Network & Internet Airplane mode. Turn on NFC 2. Turn off the Airplane mode. 3. Turn on the NFC function. Chapter 3. Explore your computer 35 The card is in NFC Data Exchange Format (NDEF), otherwise the card cannot be detected. Pair with an NFC card or NFC-enabled smartphone Before you start, ensure that:
The smartphone screen is facing upward. To pair with an NFC card or smartphone:
1. Place the card or smartphone closely near the NFC mark or label area on your computer. 2. Slowly move the card or smartphone around the NFC mark or label until you are prompted that the device has been successfully detected. Attention: During the data transfer, do not put your computer to sleep mode or lock the smartphone;
otherwise, your data might get damaged. Airplane mode When the Airplane mode is enabled, all wireless features are disabled. To enable or disable the Airplane mode:
1. Open the Start menu. 2. Click Settings Network & Internet Airplane mode. 3. Turn on or turn off the Airplane mode switch. 36 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Chapter 4. Accessories This chapter provides instructions on how to use hardware accessories to expand your computer capabilities. Purchase options Lenovo has a number of hardware accessories and upgrades to help expand the capabilities of your computer. Options include memory modules, storage devices, network cards, port replicators or docking stations, batteries, power adapters, keyboards, mice, and more. To shop at Lenovo, go to https://www.lenovo.com/accessories. You can use the following docking stations to extend the capacity of your computer:
Docking station ThinkPad Basic Docking Station ThinkPad Pro Docking Station ThinkPad Ultra Docking Station Copyright Lenovo 2020 37 Front view Note: The following illustration is based on ThinkPad Basic Docking Station. The ThinkPad Pro Docking Station and ThinkPad Ultra Docking Station might look slightly different. computer. your computer. slot. Use the system lock in the following ways:
Locked position
: The latch is locked, and you cannot attach or detach your Unlocked position
: The latch is unlocked, and you can attach or detach Removal position
: You can remove the system lock from the system-lock Note: The ThinkPad Basic Docking Station does not ship with a system lock installed. You can contact Lenovo sales to purchase a system lock with the option part number 4XE0Q56388. 1. System lock 4. Power button 5. Guide post 7. Hooks 8. Latch 2. Key lock indicator This indicator turns on when the system lock key is in the locked position. 3. Docking status indicator This indicator turns on when your computer is successfully connected to the docking station. Press the power button to turn on or turn off the computer attached to the docking station. Use the guide post to help you position your computer properly when you attach the computer to the docking station. 6. Docking-station connector Connect the computer to the docking station. Hold and secure the computer to the docking station. Slide the latch to attach or detach the computer. 38 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Rear view Figure 1. ThinkPad Basic Docking Station Figure 2. ThinkPad Pro Docking Station 1. Audio connector 2. ac power connector 3. DisplayPort connector 4. VGA connector 5. USB 2.0 connector 6. Always On USB 3.2 connector Gen 1 7. USB 3.2 connector Gen 1 8. Ethernet connector 9. Security-lock slot 10. USB-C connector 11. HDMI connector 12. Always On USB 3.2 connector Gen 2 13. USB 3.2 connector Gen 2 Figure 3. ThinkPad Ultra Docking Station Connectors ThinkPad Basic Docking Station ThinkPad Pro Docking Station ThinkPad Ultra Docking Station Chapter 4. Accessories 39 Note: The security-lock slot supports cable locks that conform to the Kensington MicroSaver lock standards
(using T-bar locking technology) or MiniSaver lock standards (using Cleat locking technology). Attach a docking station Notes:
The ThinkPad Basic Docking Station does not ship with a system lock installed. If you do not purchase and install a system lock, skip step 4 and step 7 in the following instruction. If you do not connect the docking station to ac power, the computer attached runs on battery power. 1. Connect the docking station to ac power. 2. Disconnect the cables and devices from the left side of the computer. 3. Turn the system lock key to the unlocked position (
). 4. Align the top-left corner of the computer with the guide post of the docking station. Attach your computer to the docking station as shown 1 until you hear a click. Slide the latch in the direction as shown 2 . 40 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide 5. Check the docking status indicator. The docking status indicator turns on when the computer is successfully docked. Note: If the indicator is off, your computer is not attached to the docking station successfully. To solve the problem, detach and reattach the computer. 6. Turn the system lock key to the locked position (
). Attention: When the computer is attached to a docking station, always hold the whole assembly when you need to move your computer. Otherwise, the docking station might drop down. Detach a docking station Note: The ThinkPad Basic Docking Station does not ship with a system lock installed. If you do not purchase and install a system lock, skip step 1 in the following instruction. 1. Turn the system lock key to the unlocked position (
). Chapter 4. Accessories 41 2. Slide the latch in the direction as shown 1 to release the computer, and then grasp both sides of the computer to remove it 2 . Connect multiple external displays You can connect multiple external displays to a supported docking station. To ensure that the multiple displays work correctly, observe the following guidelines and connect the external displays to the appropriate connectors. Docking station Supported external displays Video connectors ThinkPad Basic Docking Station Up to two ThinkPad Pro Docking Station Up to two ThinkPad Ultra Docking Station Up to three DisplayPort VGA DisplayPort (x2) DisplayPort (x2) HDMI VGA 42 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Chapter 5. Secure your computer and information Lock the computer Lock your computer to a desk, table, or other fixtures through a compatible security cable lock. Note: The slot supports cable locks that conform to the Kensington MiniSaver lock standards using Cleat locking technology. Do not attempt to use other types of cable locks that use a rotating T-bar locking mechanism. You are responsible for evaluating, selecting, and implementing the locking device and security feature. Lenovo makes no comments, judgments, or warranties about the function, quality, or performance of the locking device and security feature. Cable locks for your product are available from Lenovo at https://www.lenovoquickpick.com/. This section introduces types of passwords in UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) BIOS (Basic Input/Output System) and how to set, change, and remove a password. You can set a power-on password, supervisor password, system management password or hard disk password in UEFI BIOS to prevent unauthorized access to your computer. However, you are not prompted to enter any UEFI BIOS password when your computer resumes from sleep mode. Use passwords Password types Power-on password If you set a power-on password, the icon Enter the correct password to use the computer. is displayed on the screen when you turn on the computer. Copyright Lenovo 2020 43
1 2 3 4 5 | User Manual 2 | Users Manual | 4.78 MiB | January 10 2020 / July 19 2020 | delayed release |
Supervisor password The supervisor password protects the system information stored in UEFI BIOS. When entering the UEFI BIOS menu, enter the correct supervisor password when you are prompted by the icon press Enter to skip the password prompt. However, you cannot change most of the system configuration options in UEFI BIOS. You also can If you have set both the supervisor password and power-on password, you can use the supervisor password to access your computer when you turn it on. The supervisor password overrides the power-on password. System management password The system management password can also protect the system information stored in UEFI BIOS like a supervisor password, but it has lower authority by default. The system management password can be set through the UEFI BIOS menu or through Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) with the Lenovo client-management interface. You can enable the system management password to have the same authority as the supervisor password to control security related features. To customize the authority of the system management password through the UEFI BIOS menu:
1. Enter the UEFI BIOS menu. See Enter the UEFI BIOS menu on page 49. Note: When you are prompted by the icon
, enter the correct supervisor password if a supervisor password has been set, or enter the correct system management password if no supervisor password has been set. Otherwise, you cannot change the configurations in the following steps. 2. Select Security Password System Management Password Access Control. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. If you have set both the supervisor password and the system management password, the supervisor password overrides the system management password. If you have set both the system management password and the power-on password, the system management password overrides the power-on password. Hard disk passwords The hard disk password prevents unauthorized access to the data on the storage drive. When a hard disk password is set, you are prompted to type a correct password each time you try to access the storage drive. To set the hard disk password, select one of the following types:
User hard disk password only When a user hard disk password is set without a master hard disk password, the user must enter the user hard disk password to access files and applications on the storage drive. Master hard disk password + User hard disk password The master hard disk password is set and used by a system administrator. It enables the administrator to access any storage drive in a system or any computer connected in the same network. The administrator can also assign a user hard disk password for each computer in the network. The user of the computer can change the user hard disk password as desired, but only the administrator can remove the user hard disk password. 44 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide When prompted to enter a hard disk password, press F1 to switch between the master hard disk password and user hard disk password
. Note: The hard disk password is not available in the following situations:
A Trusted Computing Group (TCG) Opal-compliant storage drive and a TCG Opal management software program are installed in the computer, and the TCG Opal management software program is activated. An eDrive storage drive is installed in the computer preinstalled with the Windows 10 operating system. Set, change, and remove a password Before you start, print these instructions. 1. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1 to enter the UEFI BIOS menu. 2. Select Security Password by using the arrow keys. 3. Select the password type. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to set, change, or remove a password. You should record all your passwords and store them in a safe place. If you forget any of your passwords, any potential repair actions required are not covered under warranty. What to do if you forget your power-on password If you forget your power-on password, do the following to remove the power-on password:
If you have set a supervisor password and remember it:
1. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, immediately press F1. 2. Type the supervisor password to enter the UEFI BIOS menu. 3. Select Security Password Power-On Password by using the arrow keys. 4. Type the current supervisor password in the Enter Current Password field. Then, leave the Enter New Password field blank, and press Enter twice. 5. In the Changes have been saved window, press Enter. 6. Press F10 to save changes and exit the UEFI BIOS menu. power-on password removed. What to do if you forget your hard disk password If you have not set a supervisor password, contact a Lenovo authorized service provider to have the If you forget your user hard disk password or both user and master hard disk passwords, Lenovo cannot reset your passwords or recover data from the storage drive. You can contact a Lenovo authorized service provider to have the storage drive replaced. A fee will be charged for parts and service. If the storage drive is a CRU (Customer Replaceable Unit), you can also contact Lenovo to purchase a new storage drive to replace the old one by yourself. To check whether the storage drive is a CRU and the relevant replacement procedure, see Chapter 7 CRU replacement on page 55. What to do if you forget your supervisor password If you forget your supervisor password, there is no service procedure to remove the password. You have to contact a Lenovo authorized service provider to have the system board replaced. A fee will be charged for parts and service. What to do if you forget your system management password If you forget your system management password, do the following to remove the system management password:
Chapter 5. Secure your computer and information 45 If you have set a supervisor password and remember it:
1. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, immediately press F1. 2. Type the supervisor password to enter the UEFI BIOS menu. 3. Select Security Password System Management Password by using the arrow keys. 4. Type the current supervisor password in the Enter Current Password field. Then, leave the Enter New Password field blank, and press Enter twice. 5. In the Changes have been saved window, press Enter. 6. Press F10 to save changes and exit the UEFI BIOS menu. If you have not set a supervisor password, contact a Lenovo authorized service provider to have the system management password removed. Use Power Loss Protection function (for selected models) For models shipped with an NVMe (Non-Volatile Memory express) M.2 solid-state drive, the M.2 solid-state drive features the Lenovo-unique PLP (Power Loss Protection) function to avoid data loss or damage. On very rare occasions, your computer is not responding and you might have to shut down your computer by pressing and holding the power button for about seven seconds. In this case, the PLP function enables key data of your computer to be saved timely. However, there is no guarantee that all data is saved in any situation. To check the type of your M.2 solid-state drive:
1. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F10 to enter the Lenovo diagnostics window. 2. On the TOOLS tab, select SYSTEM INFORMATION STORAGE using the arrow keys. 3. Locate the Device Type section to check the information. Use the fingerprint reader (for selected models) If your computer comes with a fingerprint reader, you can use it to enroll your fingerprints. After enrollment, you can tap your finger on the fingerprint reader to log in to Windows. Enroll your fingerprints Open the Start menu and then click Settings Accounts Sign-in options. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to finish the enrollment. During the enrollment, the fingerprints are associated with the Windows password automatically. It is recommended that you enroll more than one fingerprint in case of any injuries to your fingers. Log in with your fingerprint Maintain the fingerprint reader To ensure that the fingerprint reader works correctly, do not:
Scratch the surface of the reader with anything hard. 46 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Use or touch the reader with a wet, dirty, wrinkled, or injured finger. Attention: If you always use your fingerprint to log in to the computer, you might forget your passwords. Write down your passwords, and keep them in a safe place. Use face authentication (for selected models) If your computer comes with a Windows Hello-compatible infrared camera, you can unlock your computer by scanning your face instead of using a password. Slide ThinkShutter to the right to uncover the camera lens before using the Windows Hello face recognition. Create face ID 1. Open the Start menu and click Settings Accounts Sign-in options. 2. Scroll down to the Password section and click Add to create a password. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to create a Personal Identification Number (PIN). 4. Locate the Windows Hello section and click Set up under Face Recognition. Then, click Get Started. 5. Enter the PIN you have set earlier. The camera preview starts. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup. 7. Click Improve Recognition to improve the image so that Windows Hello can recognize you in different light conditions or when your appearance changes. Log in with face authentication 1. On the Windows lock screen, select the smiling face icon from the sign-in options. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions and ensure that you are centered and looking directly at the camera. When the program recognizes your face, it automatically unlocks the screen and signs you in to the Windows operating system. Use firewalls and antivirus programs Your computer might be preinstalled with a firewall program. The firewall protects against computer Internet security threats, unauthorized access, intrusions, and Internet attacks. It also protects your privacy. A full version of antivirus program is provided with a free 30-day subscription. After 30 days, you must renew the license to continue receiving the antivirus program updates. For more information, see the help system of the program. Chapter 5. Secure your computer and information 47 48 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Chapter 6. Configure advanced settings This chapter provides information about UEFI BIOS, RAID, recovery, operating system installation, and system management. This section introduces what is UEFI BIOS and the operations you can perform in UEFI BIOS. UEFI BIOS What is UEFI BIOS UEFI BIOS is the first program that the computer runs when the computer is turned on. UEFI BIOS initializes the hardware components and loads the operating system and other programs. Your computer comes with a setup program with which you can change UEFI BIOS settings. Enter the UEFI BIOS menu Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1 to enter the UEFI BIOS menu. Note: If you have set the supervisor password, enter the correct password when prompted. You also can press Enter to skip the password prompt and enter the UEFI BIOS menu. However, you cannot change the system configurations that are protected by the supervisor password. Navigate in the UEFI BIOS interface Attention: The default configurations are already optimized for you in boldface. Improper change of the configurations might cause unexpected results. You can navigate in the UEFI BIOS interface by pressing the following keys:
F1 F9 F10 F5 /
F6 / +
Esc Enter Display the General Help screen. Restore to the default settings. Save your configuration and exit. Change to a lower value. Change to a higher value. Locate an item. Select a tab. Exit the submenu and return to the parent menu. Enter the selected tab or submenu. Change the startup sequence 1. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1. 2. Select Startup Boot. Then, press Enter. The default device order list is displayed. Note: No bootable device is displayed if the computer cannot start from any devices or the operating system cannot be found. 3. Set the startup sequence as desired. Copyright Lenovo 2020 49 4. Press F10 to save the changes and exit. To change the startup sequence temporarily:
1. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F12. 2. Select the device that you want the computer to start from and press Enter. Set the system date and time 1. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1. 2. Select Date/Time and set the system date and time as desired. 3. Press F10 to save changes and exit. Update UEFI BIOS When you install a new program, device driver, or hardware component, you might need to update UEFI BIOS. Download and install the latest UEFI BIOS update package by one of the following methods:
Open Lenovo Vantage to check the available update packages. If the latest UEFI BIOS update package is available, follow the on-screen instructions to download and install the package. Go to https://pcsupport.lenovo.com and select the entry for your computer. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to download and install the latest UEFI BIOS update package. Recovery information This section introduces the recovery information of the Windows 10 operating system. Ensure that you read and follow the on-screen recovery instructions. The data on your computer might be deleted during the recovery process. To avoid data loss, make a backup copy of all the data that you want to keep. Restore system files and settings to an earlier point 1. Go to Control Panel and view by Large icons or Small icons. 2. Click Recovery Open System Restore. Then, follow the on-screen instructions. Restore your files from a backup Note: If you use the File History tool to restore your files from a backup, ensure that you backed up your data earlier with the tool. 1. Go to Control Panel and view by Large icons or Small icons. 2. Click File History Restore personal files. Then, follow the on-screen instructions. Reset your computer In the resetting process, you can choose to keep your files or remove them when you reinstall the operating system. Note: The items in the graphical user interface (GUI) might change without notice. 1. Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Update & Security Recovery. 2. In the Reset this PC section, click Get started. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to reset your computer. 50 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Use advanced options Note: The items in the graphical user interface (GUI) might change without notice. 1. Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Update & security Recovery. 2. In the Advanced startup section, click Restart now Troubleshoot Advanced options. 3. Select a preferred option, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Windows automatic recovery Note: Ensure that your computer is connected to ac power during the recovery process. The Windows recovery environment on your computer operates independently from the Windows 10 operating system. It enables you to recover or repair the operating system even if the Windows 10 operating system fails to start. After two consecutive failed boot attempts, the Windows recovery environment starts automatically. Then you can choose repair and recovery options by following the on-screen instructions. Create and use a recovery USB device It is recommended that you create a recovery USB drive as early as possible as a backup for the Windows recovery programs. With the recovery USB drive, you can troubleshoot and fix the problems even if the preinstalled Windows recovery programs are damaged. If you did not create a recovery USB drive as a precautionary measure, you can contact Lenovo Customer Support Center and purchase one from Lenovo. For a list of the Lenovo Support phone numbers for your country or region, go to:
https://pcsupport.lenovo.com/supportphonelist Create a recovery USB drive Attention: The creation process deletes anything stored on the USB drive. To avoid data loss, make a backup copy of all the data that you want to keep. 1. Ensure that your computer is connected to ac power. 2. Prepare a USB drive with at least 16 GB of storage capacity. The actual USB capacity required depends on the size of the recovery image. 3. Connect the prepared USB drive to the computer. 4. Type recovery in the search box. Then, click Create a recovery drive. 5. Click Yes in the User Account Control window to allow the Recovery Media Creator program to start. 6. In the Recovery Drive window, follow the on-screen instructions to create a recovery USB drive. Use the recovery USB drive 1. Ensure that your computer is connected to ac power. 2. Connect the recovery USB drive to the computer. opens. 4. Select the recovery USB drive as the boot device. 5. Click Troubleshoot to display optional recovery solutions. 3. Turn on or restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F12. The Boot Menu window 6. Select a recovery solution as desired. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the process. Chapter 6. Configure advanced settings 51 Install Windows 10 and drivers This section provides instructions on installing a Windows 10 operating system and device drivers. Install a Windows 10 operating system Microsoft constantly makes updates to the Windows 10 operating system. Before installing a particular Windows 10 version, check the compatibility list for the Windows version. For details, go to https://
support.lenovo.com/us/en/solutions/windows-support. Attention:
might cause security risks. It is recommended that you update your operating system through official channels. Any unofficial update The process of installing a new operating system deletes all the data on your internal storage drive, including the data stored in a hidden folder. For computer models that are installed with hybrid solid-state drive (with Intel Optane memory), ensure that you do not install the operating system into Optane memory. 1. If you are using the Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption feature and your computer has a Trusted Platform Module, ensure that you have disabled the feature. 2. Ensure that the security chip is set to Active. a. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1 to enter the UEFI BIOS menu. b. Select Security Security Chip and press Enter. The Security Chip submenu opens. c. Ensure that the security chip for TPM 2.0 is set to Active. d. Press F10 to save the settings and exit. 3. For computer models that are installed with hybrid solid-state drive (with Intel Optane memory), enter the UEFI BIOS menu and select Config Storage Controller mode. Ensure that RST mode is selected. 4. Connect the drive that contains the operating system installation program to the computer. 5. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1 to enter the UEFI BIOS menu. 6. Select Startup Boot to display the Boot Priority Order submenu. 7. Select the drive that contains the operating system installation program, for example, USB HDD. Then, press Esc. and exit. security patches. Attention: After you change the startup sequence, ensure that you select the correct device during a copy, a save, or a format operation. If you select the wrong device, the data on that device might be erased or overwritten. 8. Select Restart and ensure that OS Optimized Defaults is enabled. Then, press F10 to save the settings 9. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the device drivers and necessary programs. 10. After installing the device drivers, apply Windows Update to get the latest updates, for example the 11. Go to Microsoft Store to download and install the latest version of Lenovo Vantage. Note: After installing the operating system, do not change the initial UEFI/Legacy Boot setting in the UEFI BIOS menu. Otherwise, the operating system will not start correctly. For computer models that are installed with hybrid solid-state drive (with Intel Optane memory), continue to enable the Intel Optane memory by doing the following:
52 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide 1. Go to https://pcsupport.lenovo.com. Download and install the Intel Rapid Storage Technology (iRST) 2. Go to Microsoft Store to download and install Intel Optane Memory and Storage Management 3. Launch the program. Click Intel Optane Memory Enable Intel Optane Memory, and then follow the Driver on your computer. program. instructions on the screen to enable it. Install device drivers You should download the latest driver for a component when you notice poor performance from that component or when you added a component. This action might eliminate the driver as the potential cause of a problem. Download and install the latest driver by one of the following methods:
Open Lenovo Vantage to check the available update packages. Select the update packages you want, and then follow the on-screen instructions to download and install the packages. Go to https://pcsupport.lenovo.com and select the entry for your computer. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to download and install necessary drivers and software. Chapter 6. Configure advanced settings 53 54 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Chapter 7. CRU replacement What are CRUs Customer Replaceable Units (CRUs) are parts that can be upgraded or replaced by the customer. The computers contain the following types of CRUs:
Self-service CRUs: Refer to parts that can be installed or replaced easily by customer themselves or by trained service technicians at an additional cost. Optional-service CRUs: Refer to parts that can be installed or replaced by customers with a greater skill level. Trained service technicians can also provide service to install or replace the parts under the type of warranty designated for the customers machine. If you intend on installing a CRU, Lenovo will ship the CRU to you. CRU information and replacement instructions are shipped with your product and are available from Lenovo at any time upon request. You might be required to return the defective part that is replaced by the CRU. When return is required: (1) return instructions, a prepaid shipping label, and a container will be included with the replacement CRU; and (2) you might be charged for the replacement CRU if Lenovo does not receive the defective CRU within thirty (30) days of your receipt of the replacement CRU. For full details, see the Lenovo Limited Warranty documentation at https://www.lenovo.com/warranty/llw_02. Refer to the following CRU list for your computer. Self-service CRUs ac power adapter Base cover assembly M.2 solid-state drive*
Nano-SIM-card tray*
Pen charger (for X1 Yoga Gen 5 only) Power cord ThinkPad Pen Pro (for X1 Yoga Gen 5 only) Wireless WAN card*
* for selected models Disable Fast Startup and the built-in battery Before replacing any CRU, ensure that you disable Fast Startup first and then disable the built-in battery. To disable Fast Startup:
1. Go to Control Panel and view by Large icons or Small icons. 2. Click Power Options, and then click Choose what the power buttons do on the left pane. 3. Click Change settings that are currently unavailable at the top. 4. If prompted by User Account Control (UAC), click Yes. 5. Clear the Turn on fast startup check box, and then click Save changes. To disable the built-in battery:
Copyright Lenovo 2020 55 1. Restart your computer. When the logo screen is displayed, immediately press F1 to enter the UEFI BIOS menu. 2. Select Config Power. The Power submenu is displayed. 3. Select Disable Built-in Battery and press Enter. 4. Select Yes in the Setup Confirmation window. The built-in battery is disabled and the computer turns off automatically. Wait three to five minutes to let the computer cool. Replace a CRU Follow the replacement procedure to replace a CRU. Base cover assembly Prerequisite Before you start, read Appendix A Important safety information on page 69 and print the following instructions. Note: Do not remove the base cover assembly when your computer is connected to ac power. Otherwise, there might be a risk of short circuits. Replacement procedure 1. Disable the built-in battery. See Disable Fast Startup and the built-in battery on page 55. 2. Turn off the computer and disconnect the computer from ac power and all connected cables. 3. Close the computer display and turn over the computer. 4. Loosen the screws that secure the base cover assembly 1 . Then, pry up the latches and remove the base cover assembly 2 . 56 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide 5. Install the new base cover assembly in place 1 2 . Ensure that the latches of the base cover assembly are secured under the base cover assembly. Then, tighten the screws in ascending alphabetical order (a to e) to secure the base cover assembly 3 . 6. Turn over the computer. Connect the ac power adapter and all disconnected cables to the computer. Troubleshooting If the computer does not start up after you reinstall the base cover assembly, disconnect the ac power adapter and then reconnect it to the computer. Wireless-WAN card (for selected models) The following information is only for the computer with user-installable modules. Ensure that you use only a Lenovo-authorized wireless module specifically tested for this computer model. Otherwise, the computer will generate an error-code beep sequence when you turn on the computer. Prerequisite Before you start, read Appendix A Important safety information on page 69 and print the following instructions. Attention: Do not touch the contact edge of the wireless-WAN card. Otherwise, the wireless-WAN card might get damaged. Replacement procedure 1. Disable the built-in battery. See Disable Fast Startup and the built-in battery on page 55. 2. Turn off the computer and disconnect the computer from ac power and all connected cables. 3. Close the computer display and turn over the computer. 4. Remove the base cover assembly. See Base cover assembly on page 56. Chapter 7. CRU replacement 57 5. Remove the wireless-WAN card:
a. Gently disconnect the wireless cable connectors with your fingers 1 . Then, remove the screw that secures the wireless-WAN card 2 and the card pops up. b. Carefully remove the wireless-WAN card out of the slot 3 . 6. Install a new wireless-WAN card:
a. Align the contact edge of the new wireless-WAN card with the key in the slot. Then, carefully insert the card into the slot at an angle of about 20 degrees 1 and pivot the card downward 2 . b. Install the screw to secure the wireless-WAN card in place 3 . Connect the wireless cable connectors to the card 4 . Ensure that you connect the orange cable to the main connector on the card, and the blue cable to the auxiliary connector on the card. 7. Reinstall the base cover assembly. 8. Turn over the computer. Connect the ac power adapter and all disconnected cables to the computer. 58 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide M.2 solid-state drive Prerequisite Before you start, read Appendix A Important safety information on page 69 and print the following instructions. Attention: If you install a new solid-state drive, you need to install a new operating system. For details, see Install Windows 10 and drivers on page 52. The M.2 solid-state drive is sensitive. Inappropriate handling might cause damage and permanent loss of data. When handling the M.2 solid-state drive, observe the following guidelines:
Replace the M.2 solid-state drive only for upgrade or repair. The M.2 solid-state drive is not designed for frequent changes or replacement. Before replacing the M.2 solid-state drive, make a backup copy of all the data that you want to keep. Do not apply pressure to the M.2 solid-state drive. Do not touch the contact edge or circuit board of the M.2 solid-state drive. Otherwise, the M.2 solid-state drive might get damaged. Do not make the M.2 solid-state drive subject to physical shocks or vibration. Put the M.2 solid-state drive on a soft material, such as cloth, to absorb physical shocks. Replacement procedure 1. If you are going to replace a hybrid solid-state drive (with Intel Optane memory), disable the Intel Optane memory by doing the following:
a. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1. Note: If a supervisor password has been set, enter the correct password when prompted. You also can press Enter to skip the password prompt and enter the BIOS menu. However, you cannot change the system configurations that are protected by the supervisor password. b. Select Config Storage Intel (R) Rapid Storage Technology Intel Optane Disable. c. Select to preserve user data and select Yes to confirm your operation. d. Select Disable and wait for the process to complete. Note: It might take a couple of minutes or even hours to complete the disabling process. Do not restart the computer until the process is completed. e. Press F10 to save changes and exit. 2. Disable the built-in battery. See Disable Fast Startup and the built-in battery on page 55. 3. Turn off the computer and disconnect the computer from ac power and all connected cables. 4. Close and computer display and turn over the computer. 5. Remove the base cover assembly. See Base cover assembly on page 56. Chapter 7. CRU replacement 59 a. Remove the screw that secures the M.2 solid-state drive 1 . The M.2 solid-state drive is released 6. Remove the M.2 solid-state drive from the secured position and pivots upward. b. Carefully remove the drive out of the slot 2 . 7. Install a new M.2 solid-state drive a. Align the contact edge of the M.2 solid-state drive with the key in the slot. Then, carefully insert the drive into the slot at an angle of about 20 degrees and pivot the M.2 solid-state drive downward 2 . b. Install the screw to secure the M.2 solid-state drive 3 . 8. Reinstall the base cover assembly. 9. Turn over the computer. Connect the ac power adapter and all disconnected cables to the computer. 60 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Pen charger (for X1 Yoga Gen 5 only) Before you start, read Appendix A Important safety information on page 69 and print the following instructions. Prerequisite Replacement procedure 1. Disable the built-in battery. See Disable Fast Startup and the built-in battery on page 55. 2. Turn off the computer and disconnect the computer from ac power and all connected cables. 3. Close and computer display and turn over the computer. 4. Remove the base cover assembly. See Base cover assembly on page 56. 5. Remove the screw that secures the pen charger 1 and detach the connector 2 . Then, remove the pen charger 3 . Chapter 7. CRU replacement 61 6. Install a new pen charger in place 1 . Install the screw to secure the pen charger 2 and attach the connector 3 . 7. Reinstall the base cover assembly. 8. Turn over the computer. Connect the ac power adapter and all disconnected cables to the computer. 62 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Chapter 8. Help and support Frequently asked questions How do I access Control Panel?
Open the Start menu and click Windows System Control Panel. Use Windows Search. How do I turn off my computer?
Open the Start menu and click Power. Then, click Shut down. How do I partition my storage drive?
https://support.lenovo.com/solutions/ht503851 What do I do if my computer stops responding. What do I do if I spill liquid on the computer?
1. Press and hold the power button until the computer turns off. Then, restart the computer. 2. If step 1 does not work:
For models with an emergency reset hole: Insert a straightened paper clip into the emergency reset hole to cut off power supply temporarily. Then, restart the computer with ac power connected. For models without an emergency reset hole:
For models with the removable battery, remove the removable battery and disconnect all power sources. Then, reconnect to ac power and restart the computer. For models with the built-in battery, disconnect all power sources. Press and hold the power button for about seven seconds. Then, reconnect to ac power and restart the computer. 1. Carefully unplug the ac power adapter and turn off the computer immediately. The more quickly you stop the current from passing through the computer the more likely you will reduce damage from short circuits. Attention: Although you might lose some data or work by turning off the computer immediately, leaving the computer on might make your computer unusable. 2. Do not try to drain out the liquid by turning over the computer. If your computer has keyboard drainage holes on the bottom, the liquid will be drained out through the holes. 3. Wait until you are certain that all the liquid is dry before turning on your computer. How do I enter the UEFI BIOS menu?
Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1 to enter the UEFI BIOS menu. How do I disable my trackpad?
1. Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Devices Touchpad. 2. In the Touchpad section, turn off the Touchpad control. Where can I get the latest device drivers and UEFI BIOS?
Update UEFI BIOS on page 50. From Lenovo Vantage. See Install Windows 10 and drivers on page 52 and Download from Lenovo Support Web site at https://pcsupport.lenovo.com. Copyright Lenovo 2020 63 Error messages If you see a message that is not included in the following table, record the error message first, then shut down the computer and call Lenovo for help. See Lenovo Customer Support Center on page 67. Message Solution 0190: Critical low-battery error The computer turned off because the battery power is low. Connect the ac power adapter to the computer and charge the batteries. 0191: System Security - Invalid remote change requested The system configuration change has failed. Confirm the operation and try again. 0199: System Security - Security password retry count exceeded. This message is displayed when you enter a wrong supervisor password more than three times. Confirm the supervisor password and try again. 0271: Check Date and Time settings. The date or the time is not set in the computer. Enter the UEFI BIOS menu and set the date and time. 210x/211x: Detection/Read error on HDDx/SSDx The storage drive is not working. Reinstall the storage drive. If the problem still exists, replace the storage drive. Error: The non-volatile system UEFI variable storage is nearly full. Note:
This error indicates that the operating system or programs cannot create, modify, or delete data in the non-volatile system UEFI variable storage due to insufficient storage space after POST. The non-volatile system UEFI variable storage is used by the UEFI BIOS and by the operating system or programs. This error occurs when the operating system or programs store large amounts of data in the variable storage. All data needed for POST, such as UEFI BIOS setup settings, chipset, or platform configuration data, are stored in a separate UEFI variable storage. Press F1 after the error message is displayed to enter the UEFI BIOS menu. A dialog asks for confirmation to clean up the storage. If you select Yes, all data that were created by the operating system or programs will be deleted except global variables defined by the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface Specification. If you select No, all data will be kept, but the operating system or programs will not be able to create, modify, or delete data in the storage. If this error happens at a service center, Lenovo authorized service personnel will clean up the non-volatile system UEFI variable storage using the preceding solution. Fan error. Press ESC to startup with limited performance The thermal fan does not work correctly.After the error message is displayed, press ESC within five seconds to start up the computer with limited performance. Otherwise, the computer will be shut down immediately. 64 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Beep errors Lenovo SmartBeep technology enables you to decode beep errors with your smartphone when a black screen occurs with beeps from your computer. To decode the beep error with Lenovo SmartBeep technology:
1. Go to https://support.lenovo.com/smartbeep or scan the following QR Code. 2. Download the proper diagnostic app and install it on your smartphone. 3. Run the diagnostic app and place the smartphone near the computer. 4. Press Fn on your computer to emit the beep again. The diagnostic app decodes the beep error and shows possible solutions on the smartphone. Note: Do not attempt to service a product yourself unless instructed to do so by the Customer Support Center or product documentation. Only use a Lenovo-authorized service provider to repair your product. Chapter 8. Help and support 65 Use the following self-help resources to learn more about the computer and troubleshoot problems. How to access?
Self-help resources Resources Use Lenovo Vantage to:
Configure device settings. Download and install UEFI BIOS, drivers, and firmware updates. Open the Start menu and click Lenovo Vantage. Secure your computer from outside threats. Use Windows Search. Check the computer warranty status. Access User Guide and helpful articles. Product documentation:
Safety and Warranty Guide Setup Guide This User Guide Regulatory Notice Lenovo Support Web site with the latest support information of the following:
Drivers and software Diagnostic solutions Product and service warranty Product and parts details Knowledge base and frequently asked questions Windows help information Go to https://pcsupport.lenovo.com. Then, follow the on-
screen instructions to filter out the documentation you want. https://pcsupport.lenovo.com Open the Start menu and click Get Help or Tips. Use Windows Search or the Cortana personal assistant. Microsoft support Web site: https://
support.microsoft.com 66 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Call Lenovo If you have tried to correct the problem yourself and still need help, you can call Lenovo Customer Support Center. Before you contact Lenovo Prepare the following before you contact Lenovo:
1. Record the problem symptoms and details:
What is the problem? Is it continuous or intermittent?
Any error message or error code?
What operating system are you using? Which version?
Which software applications were running at the time of the problem?
Can the problem be reproduced? If so, how?
2. Record the system information:
Product name Machine type and serial number The following illustration shows where to find the machine type and serial number of your computer. Lenovo Customer Support Center During the warranty period, you can call Lenovo Customer Support Center for help. Telephone numbers For a list of the Lenovo Support phone numbers for your country or region, go to https://
pcsupport.lenovo.com/supportphonelist for the latest phone numbers. Note: Phone numbers are subject to change without notice. If the number for your country or region is not provided, contact your Lenovo reseller or Lenovo marketing representative. Chapter 8. Help and support 67 Services available during the warranty period Problem determination - Trained personnel are available to assist you with determining if you have a hardware problem and deciding what action is necessary to fix the problem. Lenovo hardware repair - If the problem is determined to be caused by Lenovo hardware under warranty, trained service personnel are available to provide the applicable level of service. Engineering change management - Occasionally, there might be changes that are required after a product has been sold. Lenovo or your reseller, if authorized by Lenovo, will make selected Engineering Changes
(ECs) that apply to your hardware available. Services not covered Replacement or use of parts not manufactured for or by Lenovo or nonwarranted parts Identification of software problem sources Configuration of UEFI BIOS as part of an installation or upgrade Changes, modifications, or upgrades to device drivers Installation and maintenance of network operating systems (NOS) Installation and maintenance of programs For the terms and conditions of the Lenovo Limited Warranty that apply to your Lenovo hardware product, see Warranty information in the Safety and Warranty Guide that comes with your computer. Purchase additional services During and after the warranty period, you can purchase additional services from Lenovo at https://
www.lenovo.com/services. Service availability and service name might vary by country or region. 68 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Appendix A. Important safety information Safety notices This information can help you safely use your computer. Follow and retain all information included with your computer. The information in this document does not alter the terms of your purchase agreement or the Limited Warranty. For more information, see "Warranty Information" in the Safety and Warranty Guide that comes with your computer. Customer safety is important. Our products are developed to be safe and effective. However, personal computers are electronic devices. Power cords, power adapters, and other features can create potential safety risks that can result in physical injury or property damage, especially if misused. To reduce these risks, follow the instructions included with your product, observe all warnings on the product and in the operating instructions, and review the information included in this document carefully. By carefully following the information contained in this document and provided with your product, you can help protect yourself from hazards and create a safer computer work environment. Note: This information includes references to power adapters and batteries. In addition, some products
(such as speakers and monitors) ship with external power adapters. If you have such a product, this information applies to your product. In addition, computer products contain a coin-sized internal battery that provides power to the system clock even when the computer is unplugged, so the battery safety information applies to all computer products. Important information about using your computer Ensure that you follow the important tips given here to get the most use and enjoyment out of your computer. Failure to do so might lead to discomfort or injury, or cause the computer to fail. Protect yourself from the heat that your computer generates. When your computer is turned on or the battery is charging, the base, the palm rest, and some other parts may become hot. The temperature they reach depends on the amount of system activity and the level of charge in the battery. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, could cause discomfort or even a skin burn. Avoid keeping your hands, your lap, or any other part of your body in contact with a hot section of the computer for any extended time. Periodically take your hands away from the keyboard by lifting your hands from the palm rest. Copyright Lenovo 2020 69 Protect yourself from the heat generated by the ac power adapter. Prevent your computer from getting wet. Protect the cables from being damaged. Protect your computer and data when moving it. When the ac power adapter is connected to an electrical outlet and your computer, it generates heat. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, may cause a skin burn. Do not place the ac power adapter in contact with any part of your body while it is in use. Never use it to warm your body. Do not wrap the cords around the ac power adapter while in use. To avoid spills and the danger of electrical shock, keep liquids away from your computer. Applying strong force to cables may damage or break them. Route communication lines, or the cables of an ac power adapter, a mouse, a keyboard, a printer, or any other electronic device, so that they cannot be walked on, tripped over, pinched by your computer or other objects, or in any way subject to treatment that could interfere with the operation of your computer. Before moving a computer equipped with a storage drive, do one of the following:
Turn it off. Put it in sleep mode. Put it in hibernation mode. This helps to prevent damage to the computer, and possible loss of data. 70 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Handle your computer gently. Carry your computer carefully. Do not drop, bump, scratch, twist, hit, vibrate, push, or place heavy objects on your computer, display, or external devices. Use a quality carrying case that provides adequate cushioning and protection. Do not pack your computer in a tightly packed suitcase or bag. Before putting your computer in a carrying case, make sure that it is off, in sleep mode, or in hibernation mode. Do not put a computer in a carrying case while it is turned on. Conditions that require immediate action Products can become damaged due to misuse or neglect. Some product damage is serious enough that the product should not be used again until it has been inspected and, if necessary, repaired by an authorized servicer. As with any electronic device, pay close attention to the product when it is turned on. On very rare occasions, you might notice an odor or see a puff of smoke or sparks vent from your product. You might also hear sounds like popping, cracking, or hissing. These might merely mean that an internal electronic component has failed in a safe and controlled manner. Or, they might indicate a potential safety issue. Do not take risks or attempt to diagnose the situation yourself. Contact the Customer Support Center for further guidance. For a list of Service and Support phone numbers, see the following Web site:
https://pcsupport.lenovo.com/supportphonelist Frequently inspect your computer and its components for damage, wear, or signs of danger. If you have any question about the condition of a component, do not use the product. Contact the Customer Support Center or the product manufacturer for instructions on how to inspect the product and have it repaired, if necessary. In the unlikely event that you notice any of the following conditions, or if you have any safety concerns with your product, stop using the product and unplug it from the power source and telecommunication lines until you can speak to the Customer Support Center for further guidance. Appendix A. Important safety information 71 Power cords, plugs, power adapters, extension cords, surge protectors, or power supplies that are cracked, broken, or damaged. Signs of overheating, smoke, sparks, or fire. Damage to a battery (such as cracks, dents, or creases), discharge from a battery, or a buildup of foreign substances on the battery. A cracking, hissing, or popping sound, or strong odor that comes from the product. Signs that liquid has been spilled or an object has fallen onto the computer product, the power cord, or power adapter. The computer product, power cord, or power adapter has been exposed to water. The product has been dropped or damaged in any way. The product does not operate normally when you follow the operating instructions. Note: If you notice these conditions with a product (such as an extension cord) that is not manufactured for or by Lenovo, stop using that product until you can contact the product manufacturer for further instructions, or until you get a suitable replacement. Service and upgrades Do not attempt to service a product yourself unless instructed to do so by the Customer Support Center or your documentation. Only use a Service Provider who is approved to repair your particular product. Note: Some computer parts can be upgraded or replaced by the customer. Upgrades typically are referred to as options. Replacement parts approved for customer installation are referred to as Customer Replaceable Units, or CRUs. Lenovo provides documentation with instructions when it is appropriate for customers to install options or replace CRUs. You must closely follow all instructions when installing or replacing parts. The Off state of a power indicator does not necessarily mean that voltage levels inside a product are zero. Before you remove the covers from a product equipped with a power cord, always ensure that the power is turned off and that the product is unplugged from any power source. If you have any questions or concerns, contact the Customer Support Center. Although there are no moving parts in your computer after the power cord has been disconnected, the following warnings are required for your safety. Keep fingers and other parts of your body away from hazardous, moving parts. If you suffer an injury, seek medical care immediately. Avoid contact with hot components inside the computer. During operation, some components become hot enough to burn the skin. Before you open the computer cover, turn off the computer, disconnect power, and wait approximately 10 minutes for the components to cool. After replacing a CRU, reinstall all protective covers, including the computer cover, before connecting power and operating the computer. This action is important to help prevent unexpected electrical shock and help ensure the containment of an unexpected fire that could happen under extremely rare conditions. 72 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide When replacing CRUs, be cautious of sharp edges or corners that might cause injury. If you suffer an injury, seek medical care immediately. Power cords and power adapters DANGER Use only the power cords and power adapters supplied by the product manufacturer. The power cords shall be safety approved. For Germany, it shall be H03VV-F, 3G, 0.75 mm2, or better. For other countries, the suitable types shall be used accordingly. Never wrap a power cord around a power adapter or other object. Doing so can stress the cord in ways that can cause the cord to fray, crack, or crimp. This can present a safety hazard. Always route power cords so that they will not be walked on, tripped over, or pinched by objects. Protect power cords and power adapters from liquids. For instance, do not leave your power cord or power adapter near sinks, tubs, toilets, or on floors that are cleaned with liquid cleansers. Liquids can cause a short circuit, particularly if the power cord or power adapter has been stressed by misuse. Liquids also can cause gradual corrosion of power cord terminals and/or the connector terminals on a power adapter, which can eventually result in overheating. Ensure that all power cord connectors are securely and completely plugged into receptacles. Do not use any power adapter that shows corrosion at the ac input pins or shows signs of overheating (such as deformed plastic) at the ac input pins or anywhere on the power adapter. Do not use any power cords where the electrical contacts on either end show signs of corrosion or overheating or where the power cord appears to have been damaged in any way. To prevent possible overheating, do not cover the power adapter with clothing or other objects when the power adapter is plugged into an electrical outlet. Extension cords and related devices Ensure that extension cords, surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, and power strips that you use are rated to handle the electrical requirements of the product. Never overload these devices. If power strips are used, the load should not exceed the power strip input rating. Consult an electrician for more information if you have questions about power loads, power requirements, and input ratings. Appendix A. Important safety information 73 Plugs and outlets DANGER If a receptacle (power outlet) that you intend to use with your computer equipment appears to be damaged or corroded, do not use the outlet until it is replaced by a qualified electrician. Do not bend or modify the plug. If the plug is damaged, contact the manufacturer to obtain a replacement. Do not share an electrical outlet with other home or commercial appliances that draw large amounts of electricity; otherwise, unstable voltage might damage your computer, data, or attached devices. Some products are equipped with a three-pronged plug. This plug fits only into a grounded electrical outlet. This is a safety feature. Do not defeat this safety feature by trying to insert it into a non-grounded outlet. If you cannot insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician for an approved outlet adapter or to replace the outlet with one that enables this safety feature. Never overload an electrical outlet. The overall system load should not exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit rating. Consult an electrician for more information if you have questions about power loads and branch circuit ratings. Be sure that the power outlet you are using is properly wired, easily accessible, and located close to the equipment. Do not fully extend power cords in a way that will stress the cords. Be sure that the power outlet provides the correct voltage and current for the product you are installing. Carefully connect and disconnect the equipment from the electrical outlet. Power supply statement Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following label attached. Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact a service technician. External devices CAUTION:
Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than Universal Serial Bus (USB) and 1394 cables while the computer power is on; otherwise, you might damage your computer. To avoid possible damage to attached devices, wait at least five seconds after the computer is shut down to disconnect external devices. 74 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide General battery notice DANGER Batteries supplied by Lenovo for use with your product have been tested for compatibility and should only be replaced with approved parts. A battery other than the one specified by Lenovo, or a disassembled or modified battery is not covered by the warranty. Battery abuse or mishandling can cause overheat, liquid leakage, or an explosion. To avoid possible injury:
Do not open, dissemble, or service any battery. Do not crush or puncture the battery. Do not short-circuit the battery, or expose it to water or other liquids. Keep the battery away from children. Keep the battery away from fire. Stop using the battery if it is damaged, or if you notice any discharge or the buildup of foreign materials on the battery leads. Store the rechargeable batteries or products containing the rechargeable batteries at room temperature, charged to approximately 30 to 50% of capacity. We recommend that the batteries be charged about once per year to prevent overdischarge. Do not put the battery in trash that is disposed of in landfills. When disposing of the battery, comply with local ordinances or regulations. Notice for built-in rechargeable battery DANGER Do not attempt to remove or replace the built-in rechargeable battery. Replacement of the battery must be done by a Lenovo-authorized repair facility or technician. Only recharge the battery strictly according to instructions included in the product documentation. The Lenovo-authorized repair facilities or technicians recycle Lenovo batteries according to local laws and regulations. Lithium coin-cell battery notice DANGER Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. If the coin-cell battery is not a CRU, do not attempt to replace the coin-cell battery. Replacement of the battery must be done by a Lenovo-authorized repair facility or technician. Appendix A. Important safety information 75 The Lenovo-authorized repair facilities or technicians recycle Lenovo batteries according to local laws and regulations. When replacing the lithium coin-cell battery, use only the same type or equivalent type that is recommended by the manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of. Swallowing the lithium coin-cell battery will cause chocking or severe internal burns in just two hours and might even result in death. Keep batteries away from children. If the lithium coin-cell battery is swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek medical care immediately. Do not:
Throw or immerse into water Heat to more than 100 C (212F) Repair or disassemble Leave in an extremely low air pressure environment Leave in an extremely high-temperature environment Crush, puncture, cut, or incinerate Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations. The following statement applies to users in the state of California, U.S.A. California Perchlorate Information:
Products containing manganese dioxide lithium coin-cell batteries may contain perchlorate. Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, see https://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate/. 76 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Heat and product ventilation DANGER Computers, ac power adapters, and many accessories can generate heat when turned on and when batteries are charging. Notebook computers can generate a significant amount of heat due to their compact size. Always follow these basic precautions:
When your computer is turned on or the battery is charging, the base, the palm rest, and some other parts may become hot. Avoid keeping your hands, your lap, or any other part of your body in contact with a hot section of the computer for any extended length of time. When you use the keyboard, avoid keeping your palms on the palm rest for a prolonged period of time. Your computer generates some heat during normal operation. The amount of heat depends on the amount of system activity and the battery charge level. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, could cause discomfort or even a skin burn. Periodically take breaks from using the keyboard by lifting your hands from the palm rest; and be careful not to use the keyboard for any extended length of time. Do not operate your computer or charge the battery near flammable materials or in explosive environments. Ventilation slots, fans and/or heat sinks are provided with the product for safety, comfort, and reliable operation. These features might inadvertently become blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, carpet, or other flexible surface. Never block, cover, or disable these features. When the ac power adapter is connected to an electrical outlet and your computer, it generates heat. Do not place the adapter in contact with any part of your body while using it. Never use the ac power adapter to warm your body. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, may cause a skin burn. For your safety, always follow these basic precautions with your computer:
Keep the cover closed whenever the computer is plugged in. Regularly inspect the outside of the computer for dust accumulation. Remove dust from vents and any perforations in the bezel. More frequent cleanings might be required for computers in dusty or high-traffic areas. Do not restrict or block any ventilation openings. Do not operate your computer inside furniture, as this might increase the risk of overheating. Airflow temperatures into the computer should not exceed 35C (95F). Appendix A. Important safety information 77 Electrical current safety information DANGER Electric current from power, telephone, and communication cables is hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard:
Do not use your computer during a lightning storm. Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Connect properly wired outlets to any equipment that will be attached to this product. Whenever possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. Disconnect the attached power cords, battery, and all the cables before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. Do not use your computer until all internal parts enclosures are fastened into place. Never use the computer when internal parts and circuits are exposed. DANGER Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To connect:
To disconnect:
1. Turn everything OFF. 1. Turn everything OFF. 2. First, attach all cables to devices. 2. First, remove power cords from outlets. 3. Attach signal cables to connectors. 3. Remove signal cables from connectors. 4. Attach power cords to outlets. 4. Remove all cables from devices. 5. Turn devices ON. The power cord must be disconnected from the wall outlet or receptacle before installing all other electrical cables connected to the computer. The power cord may be reconnected to the wall outlet or receptacle only after all other electrical cables have been connected to the computer. DANGER During electrical storms, do not perform any replacement and do not connect the telephone cable to or disconnect it from the telephone outlet on the wall. 78 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Liquid crystal display (LCD) notice CAUTION:
The liquid crystal display (LCD) is made of glass, and rough handling or dropping the computer can cause the LCD to break. If the LCD breaks and the internal fluid gets into your eyes or on your hands, immediately wash the affected areas with water for at least 15 minutes; if any symptoms are present after washing, get medical care. Note: For products with mercury-containing fluorescent lamps (for example, non-LED), the fluorescent lamp in the liquid crystal display (LCD) contains mercury; dispose of according to local, state, or federal laws. Use earphones, headphones, or a headset Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. Adjustment of the equalizer to maximum increases the earphone and headphone output voltage and the sound pressure level. Therefore, to protect your hearing, adjust the equalizer to an appropriate level. Excessive use of headphones or earphones for a long period of time at high volume can be dangerous if the output of the headphone or earphone connectors do not comply with specifications of EN 50332-2. The headphone output connector of your computer complies with EN 50332-2 Sub clause 7. This specification limits the computers maximum wide band true RMS output voltage to 150 mV. To help protect against hearing loss, ensure that the headphones or earphones you use also comply with EN 50332-2 (Clause 7 limits) for a wide band characteristic voltage of 75 mV. Using headphones that do not comply with EN 50332-
2 can be dangerous due to excessive sound pressure levels. If your Lenovo computer came with headphones or earphones in the package, as a set, the combination of the headphones or earphones and the computer already complies with the specifications of EN 50332-1. If different headphones or earphones are used, ensure that they comply with EN 50332-1 (Clause 6.5 Limitation Values). Using headphones that do not comply with EN 50332-1 can be dangerous due to excessive sound pressure levels. Choking hazard notice CHOKING HAZARD Product contains small parts. Keep away from children under three years. Plastic bag notice DANGER Plastic bags can be dangerous. Keep plastic bags away from babies and children to avoid danger of suffocation. Appendix A. Important safety information 79 Glass parts notice CAUTION:
Some parts of your product may be made of glass. This glass could break if the product is dropped on a hard surface or receives a substantial impact. If glass breaks, do not touch or attempt to remove it. Stop using your product until the glass is replaced by trained service personnel. Static electricity prevention Static electricity, although harmless to you, can seriously damage computer components and options. Improper handling of static-sensitive parts can damage the part. When you unpack an option or CRU, do not open the static-protective package containing the part until the instructions direct you to install it. When you handle options or CRUs, or perform any work inside the computer, take the following precautions to avoid static-electricity damage:
Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around you. Always handle components carefully. Handle adapters, memory modules, and other circuit boards by the edges. Never touch exposed circuitry. Prevent others from touching components. When you install a static-sensitive option or CRU, touch the static-protective package containing the part to a metal expansion-slot cover or other unpainted metal surface on the computer for at least two seconds. This reduces static electricity in the package and your body. When possible, remove the static-sensitive part from the static-protective packaging and install the part without setting it down. When this is not possible, place the static-protective packaging on a smooth, level surface and place the part on it. Do not place the part on the computer cover or other metal surface. Operating environment Maximum altitude (without pressurization) 3048 m (10 000 ft) Temperature At altitudes up to 2438 m (8000 ft) Operating: 5C to 35C (41F to 95F) Storage and transportation in original shipping package: -20C to 60C (-4F to 140F) Storage without package: 5C to 43C (41F to 109F) At altitudes above 2438 m (8000 ft) Maximum temperature when operating under the unpressurized condition: 31.3C (88F) Note: When you charge the battery, its temperature must be no lower than 10C (50F). Relative humidity Operating: 8% to 95% at wet-bulb temperature 23C (73F) Storage and transportation: 5% to 95% at wet-bulb temperature 27C (81F) 80 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide adapter plug. cords and cables. display. Cleaning and maintenance With appropriate care and maintenance, your computer will serve you reliably. The following topics offer information to help you keep your computer working with best performance. Basic maintenance tips Here are some basic points about keeping your computer functioning properly:
If possible, place your computer in a well-ventilated and dry area without direct exposure to sunshine. Store packing materials safely out of the reach of children to prevent the risk of suffocation from plastic bags.
(more than 13 cm or 5 inches). Keep your computer away from magnets, activated cellular phones, electrical appliances, or speakers Avoid subjecting your computer to extreme temperatures (below 5C/41F or above 35C/95F). Avoid placing any objects (including paper) between the display and the keyboard or the palm rest. Computer display might be designed to be opened and used at a certain angle. Do not open the display with force. Otherwise, the computer hinge might get damaged. Do not turn your computer over when the ac power adapter is plugged in, otherwise, it could break the Before moving your computer, be sure to remove any media, turn off attached devices, and disconnect When picking up your open computer, hold it by the bottom. Do not pick up or hold your computer by the Only an authorized Lenovo repair technician should disassemble and repair your computer. Do not modify or tape the latches to keep the display open or closed. Avoid directly exposing your computer and peripherals to the air from an appliance that can produce negative ions. Wherever possible, ground your computer to facilitate safe electrostatic discharge. Clean your computer It is a good practice to clean your computer periodically to protect the surfaces and ensure trouble-free operation. Clean the computer cover: Wipe it with a lint-free cloth dampened in mild soap and water. Avoid applying liquids directly to the cover. Clean the keyboard: Wipe the keys one by one with a lint-free cloth dampened in mild soap and water. If you wipe several keys at a time, the cloth might hook onto an adjacent key and possibly damage it. Avoid spraying cleaner directly onto the keyboard. To remove any crumbs or dust from beneath the keys, you can use a camera blower with a brush or use cool air from a hair dryer. Clean the computer screen: Scratches, oil, dust, chemicals, and ultraviolet light can affect the performance of your computer screen. Use a dry, soft lint-free cloth to wipe the screen gently. If you see a scratchlike mark on your screen, it might be a stain. Wipe or dust the stain gently with a soft, dry cloth. If the stain remains, moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water or eyeglass cleaner, but do not apply liquids directly to your computer screen. Ensure that the computer screen is dry before closing it. Appendix A. Important safety information 81 82 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Appendix B. Accessibility and ergonomic information This chapter provides information about accessibility and ergonomics. Accessibility information Lenovo is committed to providing users who have hearing, vision, and mobility limitations with greater access to information and technology. This section provides information about the ways these users can get the most out of their computer experience. You also can get the most up-to-date accessibility information from the following Web site:
https://www.lenovo.com/accessibility Keyboard shortcuts The following list contains keyboard shortcuts that can help make your computer easier to use. Note: Depending on your keyboard, some of the following keyboard shortcuts might not be available. Windows logo key + U: Open Ease of Access Center Right Shift for eight seconds: Turn on or turn off Filter Keys Shift five times: Turn on or turn off Sticky Keys Num Lock for five seconds: Turn on or turn off Toggle Keys Left Alt+Left Shift+Num Lock: Turn on or turn off Mouse Keys Left Alt+Left Shift+PrtScn (or PrtSc): Turn on or turn off High Contrast For more information, go to https://windows.microsoft.com, and then search using any of the following keywords: keyboard shortcuts, key combinations, shortcut keys. Ease of Access Center Ease of Access Center on the Windows operating system enables you to configure your computers to suit their physical and cognitive needs. To access Ease of Access Center:
1. Go to Control Panel and view by Category. 2. Click Ease of Access Ease of Access Center. 3. Choose the appropriate tool by following the on-screen instructions. Ease of Access Center mainly includes the following tools:
Magnifier Narrator On-Screen Keyboard Magnifier is a useful utility that enlarges the entire screen or part of the screen so that you can see the items better. Narrator is a screen reader that reads what is displayed on the screen aloud and describes events such as error messages. If you prefer to type or enter data into your computer using a mouse, joystick, or other pointing device instead of a physical keyboard, you can use On-Screen Keyboard. On-Screen Keyboard displays a visual Copyright Lenovo 2020 83 keyboard with all the standard keys. You can select keys using the mouse or another pointing device, or you can tap to select the keys if your computer supports multi-touch screen. High Contrast is a feature that heightens the color contrast of some text and images on your screen. As a result, those items are more distinct and easier to identify. Adjust keyboard settings to make your keyboard easier to use. For example, you can use your keyboard to control the pointer and make the keyboard easier to type certain key combinations. High Contrast Personalized keyboard Personalized mouse Adjust mouse settings to make your mouse easier to use. For example, you can change the pointer appearance and make your mouse easier to manage windows. Speech Recognition Speech Recognition enables you to control your computer by voice. You can use verbal instructions to control the keyboard and mouse. With verbal instructions, you can start programs, open menus, click objects on the screen, dictate text into documents, and write and send e-mails. Screen-reader technologies are primarily focused on software program interfaces, help systems, and various online documents. For additional information about screen readers, see the following:
To use Speech Recognition:
1. Go to Control Panel and view by Category. 2. Click Ease of Access Speech Recognition. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Screen-reader technologies Use PDFs with screen readers:
https://www.adobe.com/accessibility.html?promoid=DJGVE Use the JAWS screen reader:
https://www.freedomscientific.com/Products/Blindness/JAWS Use the NVDA screen reader:
https://www.nvaccess.org/
Screen resolution You can make the text and images on your screen easier to read by adjusting the screen resolution of your computer. To adjust the screen resolution:
2. Follow the on-screen instructions. 1. Right-click a blank area on the desktop and then click Display settings Display. Note: Setting a resolution too low might prevent some items from fitting on the screen. Customizable item size You can make the items on your screen easier to read by changing the item size. To change the item size temporarily, use the Magnifier tool in Ease of Access Center. To change the item size permanently:
84 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Change the size of all the items on your screen. 1. Right-click a blank area on the desktop and then click Display settings Display. 2. Change the item size by following the on-screen instructions. For some applications, your configuration might not take effect until you sign out and then sign in again. Change the size of the items on a Web page. Press and hold Ctrl, and then press the plus-sign key (+) to enlarge or the minus-sign key () to reduce the text size. Change the size of the items on the desktop or a window. Note: This function might not work on some windows. If your mouse has a wheel, press and hold Ctrl, and then scroll the wheel to change the item size. Your computer provides industry-standard connectors that enable you to connect assistive devices. Industry-standard connectors Documentation in accessible formats Lenovo provides electronic documentation in accessible formats, such as properly tagged PDF files or HyperText Markup Language (HTML) files. Lenovo electronic documentation is developed to ensure that visually impaired users can read the documentation through a screen reader. Each image in the documentation also includes adequate alternative text so that visually impaired users can understand the image when they use a screen reader. Ergonomic information Good ergonomic practice is important to get the most from your personal computer and to avoid discomfort. Arrange your workplace and the equipment you use to suit your individual needs and the kind of work that you perform. In addition, use healthy work habits to maximize your performance and comfort when using your computer. Working in the virtual office might mean adapting to frequent changes in your environment. Adapting to the surrounding light sources, active seating, and the placement of your computer hardware, can help you improve your performance and achieve greater comfort. This example shows someone in a conventional setting. Even when not in such a setting, you can follow many of these tips. Develop good habits, and they will serve you well. General posture: Make minor modifications in your working posture to deter the onset of discomfort caused by long periods of working in the same position. Frequent short breaks from your work also help to prevent minor discomfort associated with your working posture. Appendix B. Accessibility and ergonomic information 85 Display: Position the display to maintain a comfortable viewing distance of 510 mm to 760 mm (20 inches to 30 inches). Avoid glare or reflections on the display from overhead lighting or outside sources of light. Keep the display screen clean and set the brightness to levels that enable you to see the screen clearly. Press the brightness control keys to adjust display brightness. Head position: Keep your head and neck in a comfortable and neutral (vertical, or upright) position. Chair: Use a chair that gives you good back support and seat height adjustment. Use chair adjustments to best suit your comfort posture. Arm and hand position: If available, use chair arm rests or an area on your working surface to provide weight support for your arms. Keep your forearms, wrists, and hands in a relaxed and neutral (horizontal) position. Type with a soft touch without pounding the keys. Leg position: Keep your thighs parallel to the floor and your feet flat on the floor or on a footrest. What if you are traveling?
It might not be possible to observe the best ergonomic practices when you are using your computer while on the move or in a casual setting. Regardless of the setting, try to observe as many of the tips as possible. Sitting properly and using adequate lighting, for example, helps you maintain desirable levels of comfort and performance. If your work area is not in an office setting, ensure to take special note of employing active sitting and taking work breaks. Many product solutions are available to help you modify and expand your computer to best suit your needs. You can find some of these options at https://www.lenovo.com/accessories. Explore your options for docking solutions and external products that provide the adjustability and features that you want. Questions about vision?
The visual display screens of notebook computers are designed to meet the highest standards. These visual display screens provide you with clear, crisp images and large, bright displays that are easy to see, yet easy on the eyes. Any concentrated and sustained visual activity can be tiring. If you have questions on eye fatigue or visual discomfort, consult a vision-care specialist for advice. 86 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Appendix C. Supplemental information about the Linux operating system In limited countries or regions, Lenovo offers customers an option to order computers with the preinstalled Linux operating system. If the Linux operating system is available on your computer, read the following information before you use the computer. Ignore any information related to Windows-based programs, utilities, and Lenovo preinstalled applications in this documentation. Access the Lenovo Limited Warranty This product is covered by the terms of the Lenovo Limited Warranty (LLW), version L505-0010-02 08/2011. You can view the LLW in a number of languages from the following Web site. Read the Lenovo Limited Warranty at:
https://www.lenovo.com/warranty/llw_02 The LLW also is preinstalled on the computer. To access the LLW, go to the following directory:
If you cannot view the LLW either from the Web site or from your computer, contact your local Lenovo office or reseller to obtain a printed version of the LLW. Linux is an open-source operating system, and popular Linux distributions include Ubuntu and Fedora. To learn more about the Ubuntu operating system, go to:
/usr/share/doc/lenovo-doc Access Linux distributions https://www.ubuntu.com https://getfedora.org/
Get support information To learn more about the Fedora operating system, go to:
If you need help, service, technical assistance, or more information about the Linux operating system or other applications, contact the provider of the Linux operating system or the provider of the application. If you need the service and support for hardware components shipped with your computer, contact Lenovo. For more information about how to contact Lenovo, refer to the User Guide and Safety and Warranty Guide. To access the latest User Guide and Safety and Warranty Guide, go to:
https://pcsupport.lenovo.com Copyright Lenovo 2020 87 88 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Appendix D. Compliance information This chapter provides regulatory, environmental, RoHS, and ENERGY STAR information about Lenovo products. Radio frequency compliance statements Computer models equipped with wireless communications comply with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. Besides this document, ensure that you read the Regulatory Notice for your country or region before using the wireless devices contained in your computer. Wireless-related information This topic provides wireless-related information about Lenovo products. Wireless interoperability Wireless-LAN card is designed to be interoperable with any wireless-LAN product that is based on Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS), Complementary Code Keying (CCK), and/or Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) radio technology, and is compliant to:
The 802.11b/g Standard, 802.11a/b/g, 802.11n, or 802.11ac on wireless-LANs, as defined and approved by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. The Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) certification as defined by the Wi-Fi Alliance. Usage environment and your health This computer contains integrated wireless cards that operate within the guidelines identified by radio frequency (RF) safety standards and recommendations; therefore, Lenovo believes that this product is safe for use by consumers. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the worldwide scientific community, and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists, who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of wireless devices might be restricted by the proprietor of a building or responsible representatives of an organization. For example, these situations and areas might include the following:
On board of airplanes, in hospitals or near petrol stations, blasting areas (with electro-explosive devices), medical implants or body-worn electronic medical devices, such as pace makers. In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific area (such as an airport or hospital), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use a wireless device prior to turning on the computer. Locate the UltraConnect wireless antennas Your computer has an UltraConnect wireless antenna system. You can enable wireless communication wherever you are. Copyright Lenovo 2020 89 The following illustration shows the antenna locations on your computer:
X1 Yoga Gen 5 X1 Carbon Gen 8 1. Wireless-LAN antenna (auxiliary) 2. Wireless-LAN antenna (main) 3. Wireless-WAN antenna (auxiliary, for selected models) 4. Wireless-WAN antenna (main, for selected models) Locate wireless regulatory notices For more information about the wireless regulatory notices, refer to the Regulatory Notice at https://
support.lenovo.com. 90 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide
1 2 3 4 5 | User Manual 3 | Users Manual | 1.16 MiB | January 10 2020 / July 19 2020 | delayed release |
European Union compliance with the Radio Equipment Directive This product is in conformity with all the requirements and essential norms that apply to EU Council Radio Equipment Directive 2014/53/EU on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to radio equipment. The full text of the system EU declaration of conformity is available at:
https://www.lenovo.com/us/en/compliance/eu-doc Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the installation of option cards from other manufacturers. This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B equipment according to European Standards harmonized in the Directives in compliance. The limits for Class B equipment were derived for typical residential environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices. Este equipamento no tem direito proteo contra interferncia prejudicial e no pode causar interferncia em sistemas devidamente autorizados. This equipment is not protected against harmful interference and may not cause interference with duly authorized systems. Advertencia: En Mexico la operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Brazil Mexico Singapore Korea SAR
( 24002483.5 , 57255825 )
. SAR . SAR
. 20mm
. Appendix D. Compliance information 91 Environmental information of countries and regions This section provides environmental, recycling, and RoHS information about Lenovo products. Recycling and environmental information Lenovo encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. Lenovo offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in recycling their IT products. For information about recycling Lenovo products, go to:
https://www.lenovo.com/recycling The latest environmental information about our products is available at:
https://www.lenovo.com/ecodeclaration Important WEEE information The WEEE marking on Lenovo products applies to countries with WEEE and e-waste regulations (for example, the European WEEE Directive, India E-Waste Management Rules). Appliances are labeled in accordance with local regulations concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). These regulations determine the framework for the return and recycling of used appliances as applicable within each geography. This label is applied to various products to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather put in the established collection systems for reclaiming these end of life products. Users of electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) with the WEEE marking must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to them for the return, recycle, and recovery of WEEE and to minimize any potential effects of EEE on the environment and human health due to the presence of hazardous substances. Lenovo electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) may contain parts and components, which at end-of-life might qualify as hazardous waste. EEE and waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE) can be delivered free of charge to the place of sale or any distributor that sells electrical and electronic equipment of the same nature and function as the used EEE or WEEE. For additional WEEE information, go to:
https://www.lenovo.com/recycling WEEE information for Hungary Lenovo, as a producer, bears the cost incurred in connection with the fulfillment of Lenovos obligations under Hungary Law No. 197/2014 (VIII.1.) subsections (1)-(5) of section 12. 92 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Japan recycling statements Collect and recycle a disused Lenovo computer or monitor If you are a company employee and need to dispose of a Lenovo computer or monitor that is the property of the company, you must do so in accordance with the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources. Computers and monitors are categorized as industrial waste and should be properly disposed of by an industrial waste disposal contractor certified by a local government. In accordance with the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources, Lenovo Japan provides, through its PC Collecting and Recycling Services, for the collecting, reuse, and recycling of disused computers and monitors. For details, visit the Lenovo Web site at:
https://www.lenovo.com/recycling/japan Pursuant to the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources, the collecting and recycling of home-
used computers and monitors by the manufacturer was begun on October 1, 2003. This service is provided free of charge for home-used computers sold after October 1, 2003. For details, go to:
https://www.lenovo.com/recycling/japan Dispose of Lenovo computer components Some Lenovo computer products sold in Japan may have components that contain heavy metals or other environmental sensitive substances. To properly dispose of disused components, such as a printed circuit board or drive, use the methods described above for collecting and recycling a disused computer or monitor. Dispose of disused lithium batteries from Lenovo computers A button-shaped lithium battery is installed inside your Lenovo computer to provide power to the computer clock while the computer is off or disconnected from the main power source. If you need to replace it with a new one, contact your place of purchase or contact Lenovo for service. If you need to dispose of a disused lithium battery, insulate it with vinyl tape, contact your place of purchase or an industrial-waste-disposal operator, and follow their instructions. Disposal of a lithium battery must comply with local ordinances and regulations. Dispose of a disused battery from Lenovo notebook computers Your Lenovo notebook computer has a lithium ion battery or a nickel metal hydride battery. If you are a company employee who uses a Lenovo notebook computer and need to dispose of a battery, contact the proper person in Lenovo sales, service, or marketing, and follow that person's instructions. You also can refer to the instructions at:
https://www.lenovo.com/jp/ja/environment/recycle/battery/
If you use a Lenovo notebook computer at home and need to dispose of a battery, you must comply with local ordinances and regulations. You also can refer to the instructions at:
https://www.lenovo.com/jp/ja/environment/recycle/battery/
Recycling information for Brazil Declaraes de Reciclagem no Brasil Descarte de um Produto Lenovo Fora de Uso Appendix D. Compliance information 93 Equipamentos eltricos e eletrnicos no devem ser descartados em lixo comum, mas enviados pontos de coleta, autorizados pelo fabricante do produto para que sejam encaminhados e processados por empresas especializadas no manuseio de resduos industriais, devidamente certificadas pelos orgos ambientais, de acordo com a legislao local. A Lenovo possui um canal especfico para auxili-lo no descarte desses produtos. Caso voc possua um produto Lenovo em situao de descarte, ligue para o nosso SAC ou encaminhe um e-mail para:
reciclar@lenovo.com, informando o modelo, nmero de srie e cidade, a fim de enviarmos as instrues para o correto descarte do seu produto Lenovo. Battery recycling information for the European Union Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU). Batteries or packaging for batteries are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2006/66/EC concerning batteries and accumulators and waste batteries and accumulators. The Directive determines the framework for the return and recycling of used batteries and accumulators as applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various batteries to indicate that the battery is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive. In accordance with the European Directive 2006/66/EC, batteries and accumulators are labeled to indicate that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end of life. The label on the battery may also include a chemical symbol for the metal concerned in the battery (Pb for lead, Hg for mercury, and Cd for cadmium). Users of batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the return, recycling, and treatment of batteries and accumulators. Customer participation is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries and accumulators on the environment and human health due to the potential presence of hazardous substances. Before placing electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) in the waste collection stream or in waste collection facilities, the end user of equipment containing batteries and/or accumulators must remove those batteries and accumulators for separate collection. Dispose of lithium batteries and battery packs from Lenovo products A coin-cell type lithium battery might be installed inside your Lenovo product. You can find details about the battery in the product documentation. If the battery needs to be replaced, contact your place of purchase or contact Lenovo for service. If you need to dispose of a lithium battery, insulate it with vinyl tape, contact your place of purchase or a waste-disposal operator, and follow their instructions. Dispose of battery packs from Lenovo products Your Lenovo device might contain a lithium-ion battery pack or a nickel metal hydride battery pack. You can find details on the battery pack in the product documentation. If you need to dispose of a battery pack, insulate it with vinyl tape, contact Lenovo sales, service, or your place of purchase, or a waste-disposal operator, and follow their instructions. You also can refer to the instructions provided in the user guide for your product. 94 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide For proper collection and treatment, go to:
https://www.lenovo.com/environment Recycling information for mainland China Battery recycling information for Taiwan Battery recycling information for the United States and Canada Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive of countries and regions The latest environmental information about Lenovo products is available at:
https://www.lenovo.com/ecodeclaration European Union RoHS This Lenovo product, with included parts (cables, cords, and so on) meets the requirements of Directive 2011/65/EU on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment ("RoHS recast" or "RoHS 2"). For more information about Lenovo worldwide compliance on RoHS, go to:
https://www.lenovo.com/rohs-communication Appendix D. Compliance information 95 Turkish RoHS The Lenovo product meets the requirements of the Republic of Turkey Directive on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE). Ukraine RoHS India RoHS RoHS compliant as per E-Waste (Management) Rules. Mainland China RoHS The information in the following table is applicable to products manufactured on or after January 1, 2015 for sale in the Peoples Republic of China. 96 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Taiwan RoHS Electromagnetic emission notices Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Suppliers Declaration of Conformity The following information refers to ThinkPad X1 Yoga Gen 5 and ThinkPad X1 Carbon Gen 8. Product name ThinkPad X1 Yoga Gen 5 ThinkPad X1 Carbon Gen 8 Machine types 20UB and 20UC 20U9 and 20UA This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Appendix D. Compliance information 97 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible Party:
Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 7001 Development Drive Morrisville, NC 27560 Email: FCC@lenovo.com FCC ID and IC Certification information You can find the FCC and IC Certification information through one of the following methods:
Through an electronic-label screen (E-label screen) preinstalled on your computer. To view the E-label screen, see Regulatory labels on page 100. On a physical label attached to the outside of your computer shipping carton. Industry Canada compliance statement CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) European Union conformity EU Contact: Lenovo (Slovakia), Landererova 12, 811 09 Bratislava, Slovakia Compliance with the EMC Directive This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2014/30/EU on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B equipment according to European Standards harmonized in the Directives in compliance. The Class B requirements for equipment are intended to offer adequate protection to broadcast services within residential environments. German Class B compliance statement Hinweis zur Einhaltung der Klasse B zur elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit 98 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie zur elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit in den EU-
Mitgliedsstaaten und hlt die Grenzwerte der Klasse B der Norm gem Richtlinie. Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Gerte wie in den Handbchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren drfen auch nur von der Lenovo empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. Lenovo bernimmt keine Verantwortung fr die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der Lenovo verndert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/eingebaut werden. Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli 2007 (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten), bzw. der EU Richtlinie 2014/30/EU, der EU Richtlinie 2014/53/EU Artikel 3.1b), fr Gerte der Klasse B. Dieses Gert ist berechtigt, in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformittszeichen -
CE - zu fhren. Verantwortlich fr die Konformittserklrung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo
(Deutschland) GmbH, Meitnerstr. 9, D-70563 Stuttgart. Japan VCCI Class B compliance statement Japan compliance statement for products which connect to the power mains with rated current less than or equal to 20 A per phase Japan notice for ac power cord The ac power cord shipped with your product can be used only for this specific product. Do not use the ac power cord for other devices. Other compliance information of countries and regions This section provides other compliance information about Lenovo products. Certification-related information Product name Compliance ID ThinkPad X1 Yoga Gen 5 ThinkPad X1 Carbon Gen 8 TP00110B TP00109B The latest compliance information is available at:
https://www.lenovo.com/compliance. Machine types 20UB and 20UC 20U9 and 20UA Appendix D. Compliance information 99 Regulatory labels Depending on your country or region, you can find the government-required regulatory information through one of the following methods:
On a physical label attached to the outside of your computer shipping carton On a physical label attached to your computer Through an electronic-label screen (E-label screen) preinstalled on your computer To access the E-label screen, do one of the following:
Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F9. The E-label screen is displayed. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press Enter or tap the prompt to enter the Startup Interrupt menu. Then, press F9 or tap the Regulatory Information option. The E-label screen is displayed. Korean E-label notice TCO certification Selected models are TCO Certified and bear the TCO Certified logo. Note: TCO Certified is an international third-party sustainability certification for IT products. For details, go to https://www.lenovo.com/us/en/pdf/social_responsibility/tco_certified.pdf. Export classification notice This product is subject to the United States Export Administration Regulations (EAR) and has an Export Classification Control Number (ECCN) of 5A992.c. It can be re-exported except to any of the embargoed countries in the EAR E1 country list. Lenovo product service information for Taiwan Taiwan precautionary vision statement 3010 221 Supplemental information for the Eurasian Union
(Wi-Fi, Bluetooth .).
, 23/ , 979
, , (Lenovo PC HK Limited, 23/F Lincoln House, Taikoo Place 979 King's Road, Quarry Bay, Hong Kong) 100 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide
( /) 143401, ,
. , , 4, 1, VII,
. +7 495 645 83 38, +7 495 645 78 77.
* 2.601-2013
. , 5.1, 5.1.2, .
* , Date (
-: https://support.lenovo.com
( ) Brazil audio notice Ouvir sons com mais de 85 decibis por longos perodos pode provocar danos ao sistema auditivo. ENERGY STAR model information ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy aimed at saving money and protecting the environment through energy efficient products and practices. Lenovo is proud to offer products with the ENERGY STAR certified designation. Lenovo computers, if carry an ENERGY STAR mark, have been designed and tested to conform to the ENERGY STAR program requirements for computers as prescribed by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. For a certified computer, an ENERGY STAR mark may be affixed to the product, the product packaging, or displayed electronically on the E-label screen or the power settings interface. By using ENERGY STAR compliant products and taking advantage of the power management features of your computer, you reduce the consumption of electricity. Reduced electrical consumption contributes to potential financial savings, a cleaner environment, and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions. For more information about ENERGY STAR, go to https://www.energystar.gov. Lenovo encourages you to make efficient use of energy an integral part of your day-to-day operations. To help in this endeavor, Lenovo has preset a default power plan. To change the power plan, see Set the power plan on page 34. Appendix D. Compliance information 101 102 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide Appendix E. Notices and trademarks Notices Lenovo may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in all countries. Consult your local Lenovo representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to a Lenovo product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that Lenovo product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any Lenovo intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any other product, program, or service. Lenovo may have patents or pending patent programs covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
Lenovo (United States), Inc. 1009 Think Place - Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 U.S.A. Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. Changes are made periodically to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. To provide better service, Lenovo reserves the right to improve and/or modify the products and software programs described in the manuals included with your computer, and the content of the manual, at any time without additional notice. The software interface and function and hardware configuration described in the manuals included with your computer might not match exactly the actual configuration of the computer that you purchase. For the configuration of the product, refer to the related contract (if any) or product packing list, or consult the distributor for the product sales. Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or other life support applications where malfunction may result in injury or death to persons. The information contained in this document does not affect or change Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this document shall operate as an express or implied license or indemnity under the intellectual property rights of Lenovo or third parties. All information contained in this document was obtained in specific environments and is presented as an illustration. The result obtained in other operating environments may vary. Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. Any references in this publication to non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. Copyright Lenovo 2020 103 Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the result obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment. This document is copyrighted by Lenovo and is not covered by any open source license, including any Linux agreement(s) which may accompany software included with this product. Lenovo may update this document at any time without notice. For the latest information or any questions or comments, contact or visit the Lenovo Web site:
https://support.lenovo.com Trademarks LENOVO, LENOVO logo, THINKPAD, THINKPAD logo, TRACKPOINT, and ULTRACONNECT are trademarks of Lenovo. Intel, Intel Optane, and Thunderbolt are trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the U.S. and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows, Direct3D, BitLocker, and Cortana are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries. Ubuntu is a registered trademark of Canonical Ltd. Fedora is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc. The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Alliance, and Miracast are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance. USB-C is a trademark of USB Implementers Forum. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2020 Lenovo. 104 X1 Yoga Gen 5 and X1 Carbon Gen 8User Guide
1 2 3 4 5 | User Manual Regulatory | Users Manual | 653.70 KiB | January 10 2020 / July 19 2020 | delayed release |
X1 Carbon Regulatory Notice First Edition (April 2020) Copyright Lenovo 2020. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant to a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-
35F-05925. Contents About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
. . . . . . . 1
. 2
. 2
. 2
. 2
. 2
. 2
. 2
. 3 Chapter 1. Notice for users in USA and Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 USA - Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) . . . . . Preinstalled NFC feature . . . FCC RF exposure compliance . . . Emergency Calls
. . Simultaneous use of RF transmitters . . Radio Frequency interference requirements . . . . Canada Industry Canada (IC)
. . IC certification number Preinstalled NFC feature . Low power license-exempt radio communication devices (RSS-247)
. . Exposure of humans to RF fields (RSS-102) . . . . . Canada - Industrie Canada (IC) . Numro de certification IC . . Fonctionnalit NFC prinstalle . . Permis d'mission faible puissance - Cas des appareils de radio-communication (CNR-
247)
. . . Conformit des appareils de radiocommunication aux limites d'exposition humaine aux radiofrquences (CNR-102) . . . Electromagnetic emission notices. . Usage environment and your health . . . Precautions against electrostatic discharges (ESD) in inserting or removing the nano-SIM card . . 3
. 3
. 4
. 4
. 4
. 5
. 5
. 5
. . . 5
. 6
. Chapter 2. Notice for users in Japan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 LAN/Bluetooth
. . . LAN
. . . NFC . . 7
. 8
. . . . . 7
. WAN
() Body SAR . . . . . . . 8
. . 9
. . 9 Chapter 3. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity, wireless module declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
. . English . 11
. . 11 Bulgarian . . 12
. Croatian . . 12
. Czech . . Danish . 12
. . 13
. Dutch . . 13
. Estonian. . 14
. Finnish . . French . 14
. . 14
. German . . 15 Greek . . Hungarian . 15
. . 16
. Italian . . 16 Latvian . . 16 Lithuanian . . Norwegian . 17
. 17 Polish. . 18 Portuguese . . 18
. . Romanian . Slovakian . . 18
. 19
. . Slovenian . 19
. . Spanish . 20
. . Swedish. Turkish . . 20
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 4. Trademarks . . . . . . . . 21 Copyright Lenovo 2020 i ii X1 Carbon Regulatory Notice This manual contains regulatory information for ThinkPad X1 Carbon (compliance ID TP00109B). ThinkPad X1 Carbon Gen 8 supports the following wireless modules:
About this manual WLAN/Bluetooth combo module AX201D2W WWAN module L850-GL WWAN module L860-GL NFC module T77H747 Copyright Lenovo 2020 iii iv X1 Carbon Regulatory Notice Chapter 1. Notice for users in USA and Canada Read this document before using your computer. This computer complies with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. Install and use your computer according to the following instructions. The latest Regulatory Notice manual is available on the Lenovo Web site. To download the manual, go to https://support.lenovo.com and then follow the on-screen instructions. Lisez ce document avant d'utiliser votre ordinateur. Cette ordinateur est conforme aux normes de frquence radio et de scurit du pays ou de la rgion o son utilisation sans fil est autorise. Installez et utilisez votre ordinateur en vous conformant aux instructions ci-dessous. La dernire version du manuel Regulatory Notice est disponible sur le site Web de Lenovo. Pour tlcharger le document, rendez-vous sur https://support.lenovo.com et suivez les instructions l'cran. USA - Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This computer contains the following wireless devices and underwent the certification process of FCC CFR 47 Part 2 section 1093, Part 15 Subpart C and Subpart E, Part 27, Part 22 Subpart H, Part 24 Subpart E and Part 90 under each respective FCC ID below. FCC ID: PD9AX201D2 Wireless LAN module with Bluetooth function (model: AX201D2W) FCC ID: ZMOL850GLL Wireless WAN module (model: L850-GL) FCC ID: 2AJN7-TP00109B TP00109B with wireless WAN module L860-GL FCC ID: MCLT77H747 NFC module (model: T77H747) You can find the FCC certification information through one of the following methods:
On a physical label attached to the outside of your computer shipping carton Through an electronic-label screen (E-label screen) preinstalled on your computer To access the E-label screen, do one of the following:
Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F9. The E-label screen is displayed. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press Enter or tap the prompt to enter the Startup Interrupt menu. Then press F9 or tap the Regulatory Information option. The E-label screen is displayed. The wireless modules in your computer are preinstalled by Lenovo, and you are prohibited to replace with other wireless adapter nor remove it. If the device requires replacement due to some problem during warranty, it must be serviced by a Lenovo authorized servicer. Copyright Lenovo 2020 1 Preinstalled NFC feature If your computer integrates a Near Field Communication (NFC) device (Model: T77H747), you can find the FCC ID: MCLT77H747. The device underwent the certification process for the Part 15 Subpart C under the FCC ID: MCLT77H747. FCC RF exposure compliance The radiated output power of your computer is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, it should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of your computer. CAUTION:
The total radiated energy from the antennas connected to the installed wireless modules conforms to the FCC limit of the SAR (Specific Absorption Rate) requirement, regarding 47 CFR Part 2 Section 1093, when the computer was tested in conventional notebook computer orientation. To know the location of transmission antennas for the Wireless LAN/Bluetooth combo module and the wireless WAN module, see Locate the UltraConnect wireless antennas in the User Guide. Emergency Calls The wireless WAN module does not support voice calls, hence their use for essential communication is not possible, including emergency calls regarding the E911 rule. Simultaneous use of RF transmitters Your computer is approved for simultaneous use of the integrated wireless LAN/Bluetooth combo module and wireless WAN module. Make sure of the following conditions when you use any other external wireless option device:
When you use any other RF option device, you are requested to confirm that the device conforms to the RF Safety requirement and is approved to use for your computer. You must follow the RF Safety instructions of wireless option devices that are included in the user manual of the RF option device. wireless features in your computer. If wireless options are prohibited to use in conjunction with another transmitters, you must turn off all other Radio Frequency interference requirements When you use a wireless LAN module in the 802.11 a/n transmission mode, note that high power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5250 to 5350 MHz and 5650 to 5850 MHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Canada Industry Canada (IC) IC certification number IC: 1000M-AX201D2 IC: 21374-L850GL 2 X1 Carbon Regulatory Notice Your computer contains the following wireless devices and the IC certification number is as below. Wireless LAN module with Bluetooth function (model: AX201D2W) Wireless WAN module model: L850-GL) IC: 21863-TP00109B TP00109B with wireless WAN module L860-GL IC: 2878D-T77H747 NFC module (model: T77H747) You can find the IC certification information through one of the following methods:
On a physical label attached to the outside of your computer shipping carton Through an electronic-label screen (E-label screen) preinstalled on your computer To access the E-label screen, do one of the following:
Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F9. The E-label screen is displayed. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press Enter or tap the prompt to enter the Startup Interrupt menu. Then press F9 or tap the Regulatory Information option. The E-label screen is displayed. The preinstalled wireless LAN/Bluetooth combo module also has been tested and found to comply with the limits regarding IC RSS-247, Low-power Licence-exempt Radio communication Devices. The wireless LAN/Bluetooth combo module and the wireless WAN module are preinstalled by Lenovo, and are not removable by you. You are prohibited to replace it with any other wireless features. If the wireless LAN/Bluetooth combo module or the wireless WAN module requires replacement during warranty, it must be serviced by a Lenovo authorized servicer. Preinstalled NFC feature If you find an indication "2878D-T77H747", your computer integrates a Near Field Communication (NFC) device (Model: T77H747). The NFC device has been tested and found to comply with the limits regarding IC RSS-247, Low-power Licence-exempt Radio communication Devices. Low power license-exempt radio communication devices (RSS-247) Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause interference. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. When you use a wireless LAN/Bluetooth combo module in the 802.11 a/n transmission mode:
The devices for the band 51505350 MHz are only for indoor usage to reduce potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 52505350 MHz and 56505850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN (Licence-Exempt Local Area Network) devices. Exposure of humans to RF fields (RSS-102) The computer employs low gain integral antennas that do not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's Web site at:
Chapter 1. Notice for users in USA and Canada 3 http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/
The radiated energy from the antennas connected to the wireless modules conforms to the Canada Portable RF exposure limit regarding IC RSS-102 Issue 5, Section 4 set forth for an uncontrolled environment, and are safe for intended operation in the conventional setting. Further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Canada - Industrie Canada (IC) Numro de certification IC Votre ordinateur contient les priphriques sans fil suivants et le numro de certification IC indiqu ci-
dessous. IC: 1000M-AX201D2 IC: 21374-L850GL IC: 21863-TP00109B Carte combine sans fil LAN/Bluetooth (modle : AX201D2W) Carte rseau tendu sans fil WAN (modle : L850-GL) TP00109B avec module sans fil WAN L860-GL IC: 2878D-T77H747 Module NFC (modle : T77H747) Vous trouverez les informations relatives aux numros de certification IC via l'une des mthodes suivantes:
Sur une tiquette physique appose l'extrieur du carton d'emballage de l'ordinateur Via un cran d'tiquette lectronique (cran de l'E-label) prinstall sur votre ordinateur Pour accder l'cran de l'E-label, procdez comme suit:
Redmarrez l'ordinateur. Lorsque l'cran d'accueil du logiciel s'affiche, appuyez sur la touche F9. L'cran de l'E-label s'affiche. Redmarrez l'ordinateur. Lorsque le logo s'affiche, appuyez sur Entre ou touchez l'invite pour entrer dans le menu Startup Interrupt. Appuyez sur F9 ou touchez l'option Informations rglementaires. L'cran de l'E-label s'affiche. Le module combin rseau local sans fil/Bluetooth prinstall a t test et dclar conforme aux limites des appareils de radio-communication basse tension IC CNR-247 sans licence d'utilisation. Le module combin rseau local sans fil/Bluetooth et le module rseau local sans fil sont prinstalls par Lenovo et ne peuvent pas tre retirs par l'utilisateur. Vous ne devez pas la remplacer par une autre fonction sans fil. Si le module combin rseau local sans fil/Bluetooth ou le module rseau local sans fil doit tre remplac pendant la priode de garantie, l'opration doit tre effectue par un prestataire de services agr par Lenovo. Fonctionnalit NFC prinstalle La mention 2878D-T77H747 indique que votre ordinateur est dote d'un priphrique NFC (Near Field Communication) (modle : T77H747). 4 X1 Carbon Regulatory Notice Le dispositif NFC a t test et dclar conforme aux limites des appareils de radio-communication basse tension IC CNR-247 sans licence d'utilisation. Permis d'mission faible puissance - Cas des appareils de radio-
communication (CNR-247) Le fonctionnement de ce type d'appareil est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes:
Cet appareil ne doit pas perturber les communications radio. Cet appareil doit supporter toute perturbation, y compris les perturbations qui pourraient provoquer son dysfonctionnement. Lorsque vous utilisez un module combin rseau local sans fil/Bluetooth dans le mode de transmission 802.11 a/n:
Les appareils destins la bande 51505350 MHz devront tre exclusivement utiliss en intrieur afin de rduire les risques de perturbations lectromagntiques gnantes sur les systmes de satellite mobile dans un mme canal. Les radars forte puissance sont dsigns comme les utilisateurs principaux (c'est--dire qu'ils sont prioritaires) des bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz. Ils peuvent provoquer des perturbations lectromagntiques sur les appareils de type LE-LAN (rseau de communication local sans licence) ou les endommager. Conformit des appareils de radiocommunication aux limites d'exposition humaine aux radiofrquences (CNR-102) Les ordinateur utilisent des antennes intgrales faible gain qui n'mettent pas un champ lectromagntique suprieur aux normes imposes par Sant Canada pour la population. Consultez le Code de scurit 6 sur le site Web de Sant Canada l'adresse:
http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/
L'nergie mise par les antennes relies aux modules sans fil respecte la limite d'exposition aux radiofrquences mises par les appareils portables au Canada telle que dfinie par Industrie Canada dans la section 4 du document CNR-102, version 5 pour un environnement non contrl et permet d'affecter sans danger le produit l'usage auquel il est destin. La rduction de l'exposition aux radiofrquences est possible si le produit peut tre conserv aussi loin que possible du corps de l'utilisateur ou en dfinissant une puissance de sortie plus faible si une telle fonction est disponible. Electromagnetic emission notices Refer to your product User Guide for information regarding the FCC compliance statement and other compliance statements. Usage environment and your health The wireless device installed in the computer operates within the guidelines identified by radio frequency (RF) safety standards and recommendations; therefore, Lenovo believes this product is safe for use by consumers. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the worldwide scientific community, and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists, who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of wireless devices might be restricted by the proprietor of a building or responsible representatives of an organization. For example, these situations and areas might include the following:
Chapter 1. Notice for users in USA and Canada 5 On board of airplanes, in hospitals or near petrol stations, blasting areas (with electro-explosive devices), medical implants or body-worn electronic medical devices, such as pace makers. In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific area (such as an airport or hospital), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use a wireless device prior to turning on the computer. Precautions against electrostatic discharges (ESD) in inserting or removing the nano-SIM card Do not touch the nano-SIM card connectors. As a precaution, always make sure that your computer is in your hand before you insert or remove the nano-SIM card. 6 X1 Carbon Regulatory Notice Chapter 2. Notice for users in Japan LAN/Bluetooth Table 1. LAN / Bluetooth 003-180233 D180132003 AX201D2W Intel Mobile Communications S.A.S. 5 GHz ()
(5 GHz )
(2.4 GHz )
() 1. 2. 3.
: (https://
www.lenovo.com/jp/lsmartctr) Bluetooth 2.4 GHz (2400 2483.5 MH)
(FH) 80 m LAN LAN LAN LAN
() ID Copyright Lenovo 2020 7 2 . 4 F H 8
() LAN LAN NFC NFC Table 2. NFC AC-16074 T77H747 LAN/Bluetooth LAN/Bluetooth Lenovo LAN/Bluetooth
() ThinkPad LAN/Bluetooth 8 X1 Carbon Regulatory Notice WAN Table 3. WAN L850-GL L860-GL 003-190097 D170091201 003-190100 D180164201 TP00109A LC Future Center Limited Taiwan Branch L850-GL Fibocom Wireless, Inc. TP00109A LC Future Center Limited Taiwan Branch L860-GL Fibocom Wireless, Inc.
() Body SAR ThinkPad X1 CarbonBody SAR *1
*2 WHO 50 SARSpecific Absorption Rate SAR 2.0W/kg 4W/Kg Body SAR Table 4 Body SAR on page 9 Table 4. Body SAR L850-GL L860-GL 1.450 W/kg 1.579 W/kg Body SAR https://www.tele.soumu.go.jp/
https://www.tele.soumu.go.jp/j/sys/ele/pr/
*1 2014 4 1 WiMAX
*2 14 2 Chapter 2. Notice for users in Japan 9 10 X1 Carbon Regulatory Notice Chapter 3. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity, wireless module declarations EU Frequency band restriction English Hereby, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., declares that the wireless equipment listed in this document is in compliance with the Radio Equipment Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the system EU declaration of conformity and the EU wireless module declarations are available at the following Internet addresses:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets EU Frequency band restriction for wireless LAN Usage of this device is limited to indoor in the band 5150 MHz to 5350 MHz (channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). RF Exposure information This device meets the EU requirements and the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) guidelines for general publics exposure to electromagnetic fields. To comply with the RF exposure requirements, refer to the Setup Guide for your product for the minimum safe-operating separation distance and SAR values. Bulgarian Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. , ,
, 2014/53/E.
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets LAN 5150 MHz 5350 MHz
( 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64).
(ICNIRP) . Copyright Lenovo 2020 11 BG AT FI MT NL NO BE CH FR HR HU PL CY IE PT CZ IS RO DE DK LI IT SE SI EE LT SK ES EL LU LV TR UK SAR. Croatian Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. ovime izjavljuje da je beina oprema navedena u ovom dokumentu usklaena s Direktivom o radijskoj opremi 2014/53/EU. Cjeloviti tekst EU izjave o sukladnosti sustava i EU izjave o beinim modulima dostupne su na sljedeoj web-adresi:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets Ogranienje frekvencijskog pojasa za beini LAN u EU-u Upotreba ureaja ograniena je na zatvorene prostore unutar pojasa od 5150 MHz do 5350 MHz (kanali 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informacije o izlaganju radijskoj frekvenciji Ovaj ureaj zadovoljava zahtjeve EU-a i smjernice Meunarodne komisije za zatitu od neionizirajueg zraenja o izlaganju javnosti elektromagnetskim poljima. Da bi oprema bila usklaena sa zahtjevima o izlaganju radijskoj frekvenciji, u priruniku za postavljanje proizvoda potraite vrijednosti minimalne sigurne udaljenosti i specifine brzine apsorpcije. Czech Spolenost Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. tmto prohlauje, e bezdrtov zazen uveden v tomto dokumentu spluj zkladn i dal relevantn poadavky smrnice o rdiovch zazench 2014/53/EU. Cel znn EU prohlen o shod systmu a EU prohlen o bezdrtovch modulech je k dispozici na tto internetov adrese:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets Omezen EU pro frekvenn psma bezdrtov st LAN Pouit tohoto zazen je omezeno na vnitn prostory a frekvenn psma 5150 a 5350 MHz (kanly 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informace o vystaven radiofrekvennmu zen Toto zazen spluje poadavky EU a pokyny ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection Mezinrodn komise pro ochranu ped neionizujcm zenm) tkajc se vystaven obecn veejnosti elektromagnetickm polm. Informace o minimln bezpen provozn vzdlenosti a hodnotch SAR pro v produkt, kter jsou v souladu s poadavky na ochranu ped radiofrekvennm zenm, najdete v Nvodu k nastaven. Danish Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. erklrer hermed, at det trdlse udstyr, der er angivet i dette dokument, overholder direktivet om radioudstyr 2014/53/EU. Den fulde erklring vedrrende systemets overholdelse af EU-krav og erklringerne om de trdlse modulers overholdelse af EU-krav (hvis relevante) er tilgngelige via flgende internetadresse:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets 12 X1 Carbon Regulatory Notice Restriktioner for frekvensbnd i EU for et trdlst LAN Brug af denne enhed er begrnset til indendrs brug i frekvensbndet 5150 MHz til 5350 MHz (kanal 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Oplysninger om radioblgeeksponering Denne enhed opfylder EU-kravene og ICNIRP-retningslinjerne ( International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) for eksponering for elektromagnetiske felter. For at overholde RF-
eksponeringskravene, kan du se Brugervejledningen for dit produkt for den minimale sikkerhedsafstandsafstand og SAR-vrdier. Dutch Hierbij verklaart Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. dat de draadloze apparatuur die in dit artikel is aangegeven voldoet aan de richtlijn 2014/53/EU voor radioapparatuur. De volledige tekst van de EU-conformiteitsverklaring betreffende systemen en van de EU-verklaringen betreffende draadloze modules is beschikbaar op het volgende internetadres:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets EU-beperking van frequentieband voor een draadloos LAN Gebruik van dit apparaat is beperkt tot gebruik binnenshuis in de band van 5150 MHz tot 5350 MHz (kanalen 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informatie over blootstelling aan radiogolven Dit apparaat voldoet aan de vereisten van de EU en de richtlijnen van de ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) voor blootstelling van het algemene publiek aan elektromagnetische velden. Om te voldoen aan de vereisten voor blootstelling aan radiogolven, raadpleegt u de Installatiehandleiding voor uw product voor de minimale veilige afstand en de SAR-waarden. Estonian Siinkohal kinnitab ettevte Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., et kesolevas dokumendis kirjeldatud juhtmeta seadmed on koosklas raadioseadmete direktiiviga 2014/53/EL. Ssteemi EL-i vastavusdeklaratsiooni ja EL-i traadita side mooduli deklaratsioonide tielikud tekstid on saadaval jrgmisel Interneti-aadressil:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets EL-i sagedusvahemiku piirang traadita side LAN-ile Seda seadet vib kasutada siseruumides sagedusvahemikus 51505350 MHz (kanalid 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Raadiosagedusliku kiirguse teave Seade vastab EL-i nuetele ja Rahvusvahelise mitteioniseeriva kiirguse eest kaitsmise komisjoni (ICNIRP) juhistele elanikkonna elektromagnetiliste vljadega kokkupuute kohta. Raadiosageduslikule kiirgusele stestatud nuetele vastamiseks vt oma toote kohta kivat vhimat ohutut ttamiskaugust ja SAR-i vrtuseid seadistusjuhendist. Chapter 3. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity, wireless module declarations 13 Finnish Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. ilmoittaa tten, ett tss asiakirjassa mainittu langaton laite on radiolaitedirektiivin 2014/53/EU mukainen. Lausuma jrjestelmn EU-snnstenmukaisuudesta ja lausumat langattomien moduulien EU-
snnstenmukaisuudesta ovat saatavilla kokonaisuudessaan seuraavassa Internet-osoitteessa:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets Langattoman lhiverkon taajuusalueen rajoitus EU:n alueella Tm laite on tarkoitettu kytettvksi sistiloissa taajuusalueella 5 1505 350 MHz (kanavat 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60 ja 64). Tietoja radiotaajuiselle steilylle altistumisesta Tm laite tytt Euroopan unionin vaatimukset ja kansainvlisen ionisoimattoman steilyn toimikunnan
(ICNIRP, International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) suositukset, jotka koskevat vestn altistumista shkmagneettisille kentille. Saat listietoja radiotaajuiselle steilylle altistumista koskevien vaatimusten noudattamisesta tutustumalla tuotteen asennusoppaassa ilmoitettuihin SAR-arvoihin ja turvallisen kytn edellyttmn vhimmisetisyyteen. French Par la prsente, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., dclare que les quipements sans fil lists dans ce document sont conformes la directive 2014/53/EU sur les quipements radio. Le texte complet de la dclaration europenne de conformit et des dclarations europennes concernant les modules sans fil, s'il y a lieu, sont disponibles l'adresse Internet suivante:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets Restriction lie une bande de frquence pour un rseau local sans fil au sein de l'Union europenne Ce priphrique doit tre utilis exclusivement l'intrieur, dans la bande de frquence de 5150 5350 MHz
(canaux 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informations sur l'exposition aux RF Ce priphrique respecte les directives de l'UE et de la Commission internationale pour la protection contre les radiations non-ionisantes (ICNIRP) concernant l'exposition du public des champs lectromagntiques. Pour rpondre aux exigences en matire d'exposition aux RF, reportez-vous au Guide de configuration de votre produit afin de connatre la distance de sparation minimale pour une utilisation en toute scurit, ainsi que les valeurs de dbit d'absorption spcifique. German Hiermit erklrt Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., dass das in diesem Dokument aufgelistete drahtlose Gert die Funkanlagen-Richtlinie 2014/53/EU erfllt. Der vollstndige Text der EU-Konformittserklrung fr das System und der EU-Deklarationen zu drahtlosen Modulen kann unter der folgenden Internetadresse eingesehen werden:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets 14 X1 Carbon Regulatory Notice EU-Frequenzbandeinschrnkung fr drahtloses LAN Die Verwendung dieses Gertes ist im Frequenzband zwischen 5.150 und 5.350 MHz (Kanle 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64) auf die Verwendung im Innenbereich beschrnkt. Informationen zur HF-Exposition Dieses Gert erfllt die EU-Anforderungen sowie die Richtlinien der International Commission on Non-
Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) hinsichtlich der Exposition der Bevlkerung gegenber elektromagnetischen Feldern. Um die Anforderungen bezglich der HF-Exposition zu erfllen, lesen Sie die Einrichtungsanleitung zu Ihrem Produkt im Hinblick auf den Mindestabstand fr einen sicheren Betrieb und die SAR-Werte. Greek
, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., 2014/53/. Internet:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets LAN 5150 MHz 5350 MHz ( 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64).
(RF)
(ICNIRP)
(RF), SAR. Hungarian A Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. kijelenti, hogy a jelen dokumentumban emltett vezetk nlkli kszlk megfelel a 2014/53/EU szm, rdiberendezsekrl szl direktvban foglaltaknak. A berendezs Eurpai Uni-beli megfelelsgi nyilatkozata s a vezetk nlkli eszkzkkel kapcsolatos eurpai nyilatkozat (ha elrhet) a kvetkez weboldalon tekinthet meg:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets Frekvenciatartomnyra vonatkoz eurpai unis korltozs vezetk nlkli LAN-hlzatokhoz Az eszkz hasznlata beltrre korltozdik az 51505350 MHz tartomnyban (csatornk: 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). RF-kitettsgre vonatkoz informcik Ez az eszkz megfelel a szemlyek elektromgneses mezknek val kitettsgre vonatkoz, az EU s az International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP Nemzetkzi Bizottsg a Nem-
ionizl Sugrzssal Szembeni Vdelemrl) ltal elrt kvetelmnyeknek. Az RF-kitettsgre vonatkoz kvetelmnyeknek val megfelelsrl (tbbek kztt a biztonsgos hasznlat minimlis tvolsgrl s a SAR-rtkekrl) az zembe helyezsi tmutatban tall tovbbi informcit. Chapter 3. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity, wireless module declarations 15 Italian Con la presente documentazione, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. dichiara che l'apparecchiatura wireless indicata in questo documento conforme alla direttiva 2014/53/EU sulle apparecchiature radio. Il testo integrale della dichiarazione di conformit europea del sistema e le dichiarazioni UE dei moduli wireless, se applicabili, sono disponibili al seguente indirizzo Internet:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets Restrizioni UE sulla banda di frequenza per una WLAN (wireless LAN) L'utilizzo di questo dispositivo limitato ad ambienti chiusi in banda compresa tra 5150 MHz e 5350 MHz
(canali 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informazioni sull'esposizione RF Questo dispositivo rispetta i requisiti EU e le linee guida ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) per l'esposizione generale ai campi elettromagnetici. Per rispettare i requisiti di conformit dell'esposizione RF, consultare la Guida di configurazione del prodotto per conoscere la distanza di sicurezza operativa minima e i valori SAR. Latvian Ar o uzmums Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. pazio, ka aj dokument nordtais bezvadu aprkojums atbilst radioiekrtu Direktvai 2014/53/EK. Pilnais teksts par sistmas piemrotbu ES atbilstbas deklarcijai un ES bezvadu moduu deklarcijm ir pieejams d interneta adres:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets ES frekvenu joslu ierobeojums bezvadu LAN adapterim ierce ir paredzta izmantoanai iektelps josls no 5150 MHz ldz 5350 MHz (kanlos 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informcija par pakauanu RF starojumam ierce atbilst ES prasbm un vadlnijm, ko publicjusi Starptautisk komisija aizsardzbai pret nejonizjoo starojumu (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection ICNIRP), attiecb uz visprgu sabiedrbas pakauanu elektromagntiskajam laukam. Lai nodrointu prasbas par pakauanu RF starojumam, sk. jsu produkta Iestatanas pamcbu un mekljiet informciju par minimlo droo lietoanas attlumu un SAR vrtbas. Lithuanian iame dokumente Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. pareikia, kad belaid ranga, nurodyta iame skyriuje, atitinka Radijo rangos direktyvos 2014/53/ES reikalavimus. Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. pareikia, kad belaid ranga, nurodyta iame dokumente, atitinka Radijo rangos direktyvos 2014/53/ES reikalavimus. Vis sistemos ES atitikties deklaracijos ir ES belaidio ryio modulio deklaracij tekst galite rasti apsilank adresu internete:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks 16 X1 Carbon Regulatory Notice https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets Belaidio LAN ES dani diapazono apribojimas rengin patalpose galima naudoti 5 1505 350 MHz dani diapazonu (kanalai: 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informacija apie radijo dani poveik is renginys atitinka ES reikalavimus ir Tarptautins apsaugos nuo nejonizuojaniosios spinduliuots komisijos (ICNIRP) gaires dl elektromagnetini lauk poveikio plaiajai visuomenei. Kad laikytumts radijo dani poveikio apribojimo reikalavim, savo produkto Srankos vadove iekokite informacijos apie minimal saug naudojimo atstum ir SAR (savitosios sugerties sparta, angl. Specific Absorption Rate) vertes. Norwegian Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. erklrer herved at det trdlse utstyret som er oppfrt i dette kapittelet, er i samsvar med direktiv 2014/53/EU om radioutstyr. Den fullstendige teksten i EUs samsvarserklring for systemet og EUs samsvarserklringer for trdlse moduler, hvis aktuelt, er tilgjengelig p flgende Internett-adresser:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets Begrensinger for frekvensbnd i EU for trdlst LAN Denne enheten er begrenset til innendrs bruk i frekvensbndet 5150 til 5350 MHz (kanal 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informasjon om RF-eksponering Denne enheten oppfyller EU-kravene og ICNIRP-retningslinjene (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation) for eksponering for elektromagnetiske felter ved generell bruk. Se produktets installasjonsveiledning for informasjon om minimumsavstand for trygg bruk og SAR-verdiene som overholder RF-eksponeringskravene. Polish Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., niniejszym owiadcza, e urzdzenia bezprzewodowe wymienione w tym dokumencie speniaj wymagania dyrektywy w sprawie sprztu radiowego 2014/53/UE. Peny tekst deklaracji zgodnoci systemw i moduw cznoci bezprzewodowej z przepisami UE mona znale na nastpujcej stronie internetowej:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets Ograniczenia dotyczce pasm czstotliwoci w UE dla pocze bezprzewodowych LAN Urzdzenie jest przeznaczone do uywania wewntrz budynkw, w pasmach czstotliwoci 5150 do 5350 MHz (kanay 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60 i 64). Informacje o ekspozycji na czstotliwoci radiowe To urzdzenie spenia wymagania UE i wytyczne Midzynarodowej Komisji ds. Ochrony przed Promieniowaniem Niejonizujcym (ICNIRP) dotyczce wystawienia ludzi na dziaanie pl elektromagnetycznych. W celu spenienia wymaga dotyczcych wystawienia na dziaanie czstotliwoci radiowych zobacz Podrcznik konfiguracji do swojego produktu, aby sprawdzi minimaln bezpieczn odlego podczas obsugi i wartoci SAR. Chapter 3. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity, wireless module declarations 17 Portuguese A Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., declara por este meio que o equipamento sem fios listado neste documento est em conformidade com a Diretiva de Equipamento de Rdio 2014/53/UE. O texto completo da declarao de conformidade da UE e das declaraes de mdulos sem fios da UE para o sistema encontram-se disponveis no seguinte endereo da Internet:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets Restrio da banda de frequncias na UE para uma LAN sem fios A utilizao deste dispositivo est limitada utilizao no interior, na banda 5150 a 5350 MHz (canais 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informaes sobre exposio a RF Este dispositivo cumpre os requisitos da UE e as diretrizes da International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) para exposio do pblico geral a campos eletromagnticos. Para estar em conformidade com os requisitos de exposio a RF, consulte o Manual de Configurao do produto para ficar a saber a distncia mnima de separao para uma operao segura e os valores SAR. Romanian Prin prezenta, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., declar c echipamentul fr fir prezentat n acest document este n conformitate cu Directiva privitoare la echipamentele radio 2014/53/EU. Textul complet al sistemului de declaraii de conformitate i declaraiile privind modulele fr fir UE sunt disponibile la urmtoarele adrese:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets Restricia UE privind banda de frecven a unei reele LAN fr fir Utilizarea acestui dispozitiv este limitat la spaiile interioare, n banda de 5.150 5.350 MHz (canalele 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informaii privind expunerea la frecvenele radio Acest dispozitiv ndeplinete cerinele UE i instruciunile Comisiei internaionale pentru protecia mpotriva radiaiilor neionizante (ICNIRP) referitoare la expunerea persoanelor la cmpuri electromagnetice. Pentru a respecta cerinele privind expunerea la frecvenele radio, consultai Ghid de configurare al produsului, pentru distana minim de utilizare n siguran i pentru valorile SAR. Slovakian Spolonos Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. tmto vyhlasuje, e bezdrtov zariadenie uveden v tomto dokumente je v slade so smernicou o rdiovch zariadeniach 2014/53/E. pln texty vyhlsenia E o zhode pre systm a vyhlsen E pre bezdrtov moduly s dostupn na nasledujcej internetovej adrese:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets 18 X1 Carbon Regulatory Notice Obmedzenie frekvennho psma E pre bezdrtov sie LAN Pouvanie tohto zariadenia je obmedzen na interir vo frekvennom psme 5 150 a 5 350 MHz (kanly 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informcie o vystaven rdiofrekvennmu iareniu Toto zariadenie vyhovuje poiadavkm E a smerniciam Medzinrodnej komisie pre ochranu pred neionizujcim iarenm (ICNIRP), ktor upravuj vystavenie irokej verejnosti elektromagnetickm poliam. Na zaistenie sladu s poiadavkami v oblasti vystavenia rdiofrekvennmu iareniu sa oboznmte s Prrukou o nastaven, ktor obsahuje informcie o minimlnej vzdialenosti vyadovanej na bezpen pouvanie a o hodnotch SAR. Slovenian Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. s tem izjavlja, da je brezina oprema, navedena v tem dokumentu, skladna z direktivo o radijski opremi 2014/53/EU. Celotno besedilo izjave EU o skladnosti za sistem in morebitnih deklaracij EU za brezini modul je na voljo na tem spletnem naslovu:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets Omejitve Evropske unije glede frekvennega pasu za brezina krajevna omreja Ta naprava je omejena na notranjo uporabo v pasu od 5150 do 5350 MHz (kanali 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informacije o izpostavljenosti RF-sevanju Ta naprava izpolnjuje zahteve EU in smernice Mednarodne komisije za varstvo pred neionizirnimi sevanji
(International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection ICNIRP) za izpostavljenost splone javnosti elektromagnetnim poljem. Informacije za izpolnjevanje zahtev glede izpostavljenosti RF-sevanju so v navodilih za uporabo za ustrezen izdelek, v katerih so navedene najmanje loitvene razdalje za varno uporabo in vrednosti SAR. Spanish Mediante el presente documento, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., declara que el equipo inalmbrico indicado en este documento cumple con la Directiva de Equipos de Radio 2014/53/UE. El texto completo del sistema Declaracin de conformidad UE y las declaraciones de los mdulos inalmbricos de la UE, si corresponde, estn disponibles en la siguiente direccin de Internet:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets Restriccin de banda de frecuencia de la UE para LAN inalmbrica La utilizacin de este dispositivo est limitada a interiores en la banda de 5150 MHz a 5350 MHz (canales 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informacin de exposicin a RF Este dispositivo satisface los requisitos de la UE y las directrices de la International Commission on Non-
Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) sobre la exposicin del pblico general a campos electromagnticos. Para cumplir los requisitos de exposicin a RF, consulte la Gua de instalacin del producto, donde encontrar la informacin acerca de la distancia de separacin mnima segura y los valores de SAR. Chapter 3. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity, wireless module declarations 19 Swedish Hrmed intygar Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. att den trdlsa utrustningen i detta dokument verensstmmer med direktivet fr radioutrustning 2014/53/EU. Den fullstndiga texten i EU-deklarationen om verensstmmelse och EU-deklarationen om trdlsa moduler fr systemet finns, om tillmpligt, p fljande webbadress:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets Frekvensomrdesbegrnsning inom EU fr trdlst ntverk Enheten fr bara anvndas inomhus i frekvensomrdet 51505350 MHz (kanal 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Information om exponering fr radiovgor Denna enhet verensstmmer med EU:s krav och ICNIRP:s (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) riktlinjer avseende allmnhetens exponering fr elektromagnetiska flt. Fr att uppfylla kraven p exponering fr radiovgor, se information om minsta avstnd fr sker anvndning samt SAR-
vrden i installationshandboken. Turkish Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., bu belgede listelenen kablosuz cihazlarn temel gereksinimler ve Radyo Ekipmanlar Ynetmelii 2014/53/EC ile uyumlu olduunu beyan eder. Sisteme ait AB uyumluluk bildirimi ve ABD kablosuz modl bildirimlerinin tam metni u nternet adresinde sunulmaktadr:
https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tablets Kablosuz LAN iin AB Frekans band kstlamas Bu cihazn kullanm i mekanlarda, 5150 - 5350 MHz bant aral (36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64 kanallar) ile snrldr. RF maruz kalma bilgileri Bu cihaz, kamunun elektromanyetik alanlara maruz kalmasna ilikin AB gereksinimlerine ve Uluslararas Non-
yonizan Radyasyondan Korunma Komitesi (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection-
ICNIRP) ynergelerine uygundur. RF maruz kalma gereksinimlerine uyum gerei, minimum gvenli altrma mesafesi ve SAR deerleri iin rnnzn Kurulum Klavuzu'na bakn. 20 X1 Carbon Regulatory Notice Chapter 4. Trademarks LENOVO, LENOVO logo, THINKPAD and THINKPAD logo are trademarks of Lenovo. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2019 Lenovo. Copyright Lenovo 2020 21 22 X1 Carbon Regulatory Notice Part Number: SP40Q52295 Printed in
(1P) P/N: SP40Q52295
*1PSP40Q52295*
1 2 3 4 5 | UserMan Generic Safety 1 | Users Manual | 4.74 MiB | October 14 2020 / April 24 2021 | delayed release |
0-3 Complies with IMDA Standards DB102306 CORRS, 7AABRBECH, ORM, LCRA CHATS & eH ELTWEPI, CORN T ART LEY a Y RIBRICTER L CHES k, LAME BST I LBSVET. BEBE CE LUD HOS LTRS, YCCI-B BAORERRY 200A ATOMRCHNTSBMRERRE Be AA JIS C 61000-3-2 BAR rN Dt coi AdNBO ASS nt 4tor UBS, cS4 el Sv nu oY un Aa cil tu
+t |
Sz DERE HAAS HL FP hh LE ARB) HAE SER ACR TET BAG tt AP ah FED 2 AS a BEA Phy, RES KBEFE MLAS HLF Ph BC BEL, RE See 4 th A KUTT BAEC AD SE JE) TGALAT ELSA BE TSC SS Ai i AiGZEA http: //support. lenovo. com. cn/activity/551. htm US & Canada Only Turkiye AEEE Yonetmeligine Uyguniuk Beyani Bu Lenovo iiriinti, T.C. Gevre ve Orman Bakanligi'nin Atik Elektrik ve Elektronik Esyalarda Bazi Zararli Maddelerin Kullaniminin Sinirlandirilmasina Dair Ynetmelik (AEEE) direktiflerine uygundur. AEEE Yonetmeligine Uygundur. IMM niQTBepA>Kyemo, LUO NpPOAYKuUIA JIEHOBO BIQnoBiqae BUMOoraM 4OPMaTUBHMX akTiB YKpaiHu, Aki OOMerKylOTb BMicT HeGesneuHUXx DeUOBNH 44(Cd) A BARRA
(Cx(VD) (PBB) (PBDE) O O HA L/O_ BREE UE SO} O}O]O}O OC} OO} O] O; O}] OJ OF O oO} O;O oe S O: RAKA Wy ey 7E GB/T 26572 FE FAY BRR ESE OR :
X: RMRBA ETB AE AY Se 2 OB GBT 26572 SFE HY YE. Zh ppt EF DB] EER OR AG JR AK OF OR ll FOIE LA SE TRAN EK EVD Fe AB EL ee: CGR ET Ml] HEL A A EERE. HAR ASE Be AE RHA SA, WER AW EMP A AE, TRUS RN PLEA ME FE PABA BRS A SEA FB fie A as ns AY G oF BSE RAE IE FS ERAS PIP ih BO FS BR RAR El ABE RoHS Sti = will SF mis EX BK ER AR AMEeKE BREE USS SEES FN 42 YN ke Bot IRIE SEES dn aah SEX goth sais seas BAKE We . ROMIES Shag Pate SR eee HED PERK (Pb) | *RCHg) | (Cd) | ALM
(Cx) FUR SAA xX Oo Oo 0 tke ie Tok te Haier T/0_ PRE HU abet BU BLAINE ee olofofolojololojo} fe =
[~ 38
oJ o}o}o}ojo}o}ojo Heart BE Se 39 OB HB HR G/T YE: ie in 8 Ae BRR AR 2 OF BR TT FE HS ilu tte EVD A a eA se: Ld la A A He EMS WAR, WRAA AAU LATTE, iF SALA aH I A AS AB HA as, A SAMARAS FAP ih A RAFAL SBR TEENS G oF WOBCPARAEE ce eee BREE BR Cc] Torts SRR | SWULAM oD ie (Cd)_| (Cr (WD > | (PBBY (PBDE) ED il HB x oO RA aia xo eB x_|o LOD Tait x
(LED #
HD ak xo Att x cy x C) o MGEAC x lo cca Re. Hl x |o MAE cd Es ARAAESI/T 11364 HE fh. O: RRA BW REAM AA RA PHS BYE CB/T 26572 bn EBLE AY PEER. X: RRA BORE DEM RIT PY HE CB/T 26572 PREMERA AX EE, SRR RACE RBA, AEWA EAR. CUM REREA FE FR CUE BRAK (PCB) RGAE. SRR
(IC) AEB. KAAS HP ARRAS LAR, HEDIS PMA. Am:
Zhe RIA RSA Pe ED OR 10 rR CEPUP) 75> DARA H BOI RAR P eA TE HS RR
= RoHS - (ALA EAS IRA 4 A REALS
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (oan) (PBB) (PBDE) epee - | O | O | O | O | oO |
CS ee KO ARG RH - | O | O | O | oO | oO pete | = | CO UT UO UT UO UL COO CRRBS | - | oO | O | O | O | oO setae) | - | Oo | O | O | O | O |
aR Genet) | - | oO | O | O | O | oO meme | OT OU UT OU UT UO UT UO OT ae (Em)! - | oO | O | oO | O T oO |
eae | TO | OU UT OF UT UO TO Ha 1. AB HOLL wt % BR AB 0.01 wt % AIR ALB PS SAH APL S J&B He2. O ete MALa DUS SRA GPUS SRF fh te 3, eda A IRA th & ABBE IA
= ROHS - #ets a ARR 4 He
(Pb) (Hg) a * Os (PBB) (PBDE) Epmlewimaet - | O | O | O | O | oO |
meee UE CS UT CO CT CO CT CO CUT OO RRA - | OF | OU UT UO LT COTO pote | | CO CT CO UT COU COCO fengvOmert | - | Oo | O | O | O | oO |
TROLS p= | oO | O | O [ OO | oO gem kat) | - | Oo | O | O [| oO | Oo |
mm Geet) | - | O | O | O | O | oO |
P- [| o | Oo | O | Oo | Oo |
a act (Emme) | - | Oo | O | O [| OO fF oO |
eae | TO CT COT COE OO OT eA 1. SHO. wt % AR S48 H0.01 wt 0 AERA ELEPKLSERHADLSE KREG a2. O (RG GARADAZAPLSSARHATKSE He 3. \ eth RIA IR th & ABER IAB IRA 4 A REALS
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (oan) (PBB) (PBDE) epee - | O | O | O | O | oO |
CS ee KO ARG RH - | O | O | O | oO | oO pete | = | CO UT UO UT UO UL COO CRRBS | - | oO | O | O | O | oO setae) | - | Oo | O | O | O | O |
aR Genet) | - | oO | O | O | O | oO meme | OT OU UT OU UT UO UT UO OT ae (Em)! - | oO | O | oO | O T oO |
eae | TO | OU UT OF UT UO TO Ha 1. AB HOLL wt % BR AB 0.01 wt % AIR ALB PS SAH APL S J&B He2. O ete MALa DUS SRA GPUS SRF fh te 3, eda A IRA th & ABBE IA
1 2 3 4 5 | UserMan Generic Safety 2 | Users Manual | 1.53 MiB | October 14 2020 / April 24 2021 | delayed release |
RaZH. iew es aR AUS) Equipment name Type designation (Type) PRAY RAR Toe Restricted substances and its chemical symbols 71 SS ZiRA | SRO Hexavalent | Polybrominate | Polybrominated chromium | d biphenyls | diphenyl ethers
(Cr) (PBB) (PBDE) Cadmium
(Cd) Bmax eS 1. EBHO1 wt% RB eHO.0l wt FRAMES ZAR SSR ATDteek4(a. Note 1: Exceeding 0.1 wt % and exceeding 0.01 wt % indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 22. o" HEAR AWEZ BP a BRU DH aE. Note 2:o indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. fas3. " (AtsaZIABR AA SHERRI. Note 3: The indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. can AA SSHSte AR, REBAR, aCiBse Ase | CHehehe, ASI, Hee, Saas KERR | CSHB loa, BLEASS. RIO, Sta GERALD =
SHS RITS ORB) . BM GRA) . Sette GRAL) . BRR 2Al) . ati GRAAL) =
ENERGY STAR Be Be Fe / iE 1 a) 3 A: for Bel Be SAR APR a) i a a]
iG: ey St ik: a ae Thy oh LL Ak Se BA BOSR TAR i 2 BH BE: 0800-000-702 (Ee 3E) AERMRHCVSCABRARR AR FY ZPS/2RUSBAN MBER AB FAL Lenovo
1 2 3 4 5 | UserMan Regulatory | Users Manual | 2.91 MiB | October 14 2020 / April 24 2021 | delayed release |
(4 ny COMISION NACIONAL DE COMUNICACIONES Ladle al tiq tl Lelie Communications and Information Technology Commission Ladle al tiq tl Lelie Communications and Information Technology Commission B+he BITle
{TAS BBO E BURSA IRS Lie o
(TiS eS SE Se ORS TS cee eH BITE SETS + TEKS 1S SE YETE LE SES Bee SRE o UES o
{2 : Se Sere + Pete Shs + WEAT RIS A > UG eet es
{ETS ORES GHIA a RS SS LEE TARE 0 Se RSH Sta ABR ee Be - UY ee ee EE 2:
aiany 2S 38 SSS (Tae BARE Se > SBME TH] Wee] - Baas SH SSS Bik DBR, BIE Bik DBR, BIE Lenovo
1 2 3 4 5 | UserMan 1 | Users Manual | 5.18 MiB | October 14 2020 / April 24 2021 | delayed release |
ThinkPad. <1 N2ne en Eres)
(ort mero Leal} erid) Eres) CapsLock acsied 73) apy 7A XX-XXXXX
* Secured
[2]
XXXXXX Secured Network settings 7 a Wi-Fi Airplane mode EW 8:58 PM EA eee Ler a fel rN Nis apy rN
tf
) S))
1 2 3 4 5 | UserMan 2 | Users Manual | 4.42 MiB | October 14 2020 / April 24 2021 | delayed release |
80% /h TTT TMNT) olla hy oL-M CULitoL =e XX-XXXXXX XXXX-XXXXXX Erector) CapsLock atid fet Ol ASE ANA BAe-labelling)/ It DASSUC. Lenovo
1 2 3 4 5 | Users Manual | Users Manual | 2.48 MiB |
L850-GL Hardware User Manual VersionV1.0.3 Update date2/25/2017 Applicability Table No. Product model 1 L850-GL Description NA Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 2 of 51 Copyright Copyright 2017Fibocom Wireless Inc. All rights reserved. Copyright 2017Fibocom Wireless Inc. All rights reserved. Without the prior written permission of the copyright holder, any company or individual is prohibited to permission of the copyright holder, any company or individual is prohibited to permission of the copyright holder, any company or individual is prohibited to excerpt, copy any part of or the entire document, or distribute the document in any form. excerpt, copy any part of or the entire document, or distribute the document in any form. excerpt, copy any part of or the entire document, or distribute the document in any form. Notice The document is subject to update from time to time owing to the product vers The document is subject to update from time to time owing to the product vers The document is subject to update from time to time owing to the product version upgrade or other reasons. Unless otherwise specified, the document only serves as the user guide. All the statements, reasons. Unless otherwise specified, the document only serves as the user guide. All the statements, reasons. Unless otherwise specified, the document only serves as the user guide. All the statements, information and suggestions contained in the document do not constitute any explicit or implicit guarantee. information and suggestions contained in the document do not constitute any explicit or implicit guarantee. information and suggestions contained in the document do not constitute any explicit or implicit guarantee. Version Record Version Update date Remark Remark V1.0.0 2016-12-08 Draft V1.0.1 V1.0.2 2016-12-16 2017-02-09 Modify the PCIe Interface Application;
Modify the PCIe Interface Application;
Update the Pin Definition: change pin65 to NC Update the Pin Definition: change pin65 to NC Modify the description Modify the description Update the content of PCIe Update the content of PCIe Add the power Consumption of 3CA Add the power Consumption of 3CA V1.0.3 2017-02-25 Add product certification of warnings Add product certification of warnings Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 3 of 51 Contents 1 Foreword ................................ ............................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................... 1.1 Introduction ................................ 1.2 Reference Standard ................................ 1.3 Related Documents ................................ ............................................................................................... ............................................................................................... 2 Overview ................................ ............................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................... 2.1 Introduction ................................ 2.2 Specification ................................ 2.3 Warnings ................................ ............................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................... 2.3.1 FCC Statement ................................ 2.3.2 IC Statement ................................ 2.3.3 CE Statement ................................ ............................................................................................... ............................................................................................... ............................................................................................... 2.4 CA combinations ................................ 2.5 Application Framework ................................ 2.6 Hardware Framework ................................ ............................................................................................... ............................................................................................... ............................................................................................... 3 Application Interface ................................ ......................................... 7
.......................................... 7
........................................................... 7
............................................................ 7
.......................................... 8
.......................................... 8
........................................ 8
.............................................. 9
................................................................ 9
.................................................................. 11
................................................................ 12
............................................................... 13
.................................................... 14
...................................................... 15
................................................... 15
....................................... 15
.............................................................. 16
.................................................................. 17
.................................... 21
................................................................. 21
...................................... 22
..................................................... 23
.................................... 25
............................................................ 25 3.1 M.2Interface ................................ ............................................................................................................................... 3.1.1 Pin Distribution ................................ 3.1.2 Pin Definition ................................ ............................................................................................... ............................................................................................... 3.2 Power Supply ................................ ............................................................................................................................... 3.2.1 Power Supply ................................ 3.2.2 Logic level ................................ 3.2.3 Power Consumption
................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................... Power Consumption ................................................................................................ 3.3 Control Signal ................................ ............................................................................................................................... 3.3.1 Module Start-Up ................................ ............................................................................................... 3.3.1.1 Start-upCircuit ................................ ............................................................................................................................... .............................................. 25 3.3.1.2 Start-upTiming Sequence Sequence ................................................................................................ ............................................................................................... 3.3.2 Module Shutdown ................................ 3.3.3 Module Reset ................................ ............................................................................................... 3.4 USB Interface ................................ ............................................................................................................................... 3.4.1 USB Interface Definition 3.4.2 USB2.0 Interface Application 3.5 PCIe Interface ................................ Definition ................................................................................................ Application ................................................................................................ ............................................................................................... 3.5.1 PCIe Interface Definition Definition ................................................................................................ .......................................................... 25
......................................................... 26
................................................................. 27
.................................... 28
............................................... 28
...................................... 28
................................................................... 29
.............................................. 29 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 4 of 51 3.5.2 PCIe Interface Application Application ................................................................................................ 3.6 USIMInterface ................................ 3.6.1 USIM Pins ................................ 3.6.2 USIM Interface Circuit
................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................... Circuit ................................................................................................ .......................................... 29
................................................................... 31
...................................... 31
.................................................. 32 3.6.2.1 N.C. SIMCard Slot Slot ................................................................................................ ....................................................................... 32 3.7 Status Indicator ................................ 3.6.2.2 N.O. SIM Card Slot Slot ................................................................................................ ............................................................................................... 3.6.3 USIM Hot-Plugging ................................ 3.6.4 USIM Design ................................ ............................................................................................... ............................................................................................... ............................................................................................... ............................................................................................... 3.7.1 LED#1Signal ................................ 3.7.2 WOWWAN# ................................ 3.7.3 TX_BLANKING ................................ ............................................................................................... 3.8 Interrupt Control ................................ ............................................................................................... ..................................................................... 32
....................................................... 33
.................................................................. 34
................................................................. 34
.................................................................. 35
................................................................... 35
.............................................................. 36
................................................................ 36
.............................................................. 36
...................................... 37
................................................................... 37
.................................................. 37
.............................................................. 38
.............................................................. 38
.......................................................... 39
....................................... 39
............................................ 39
........................................ 39
............................................. 39
................................................................. 41
.......................................................... 42
.......................................................... 43
................................................. 44
................................................................ 45
.............................................. 47
........................................................ 47
.................................................... 47
.......................................................... 48
................................................................... 48
................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................... 3.8.1 W_DISABLE1# ................................ 3.8.2 BODYSAR ................................ 3.9 ClockInterface ................................ 3.10 ANT Tunable Interface ................................ 3.11 Config Interface ................................ 3.12 Other Interfaces ................................ ............................................................................................... ............................................................................................... ............................................................................................... ............................................................................................... ............................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................... nctionality ................................................................................................ 4 Radio Frequency ................................ 4.1 RF Interface ................................ 4.1.1 RF Interface Functionality 4.1.2 RFConnector Characteristic 4.1.3 RF Connector Dimension RFConnector Characteristic ................................................................................................ Dimension ................................................................................................ ............................................................................................... ............................................................................................... ............................................................................................... 4.2 Operating Band ................................ 4.3 Transmitting Power ................................ 4.4 Receiver Sensitivity ................................ 4.5 GNSS ................................ 4.6 Antenna Design ................................ ............................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................... 5 Structure Specification ................................ ............................................................................................... ............................................................................................... 5.1 Product Appearance ................................ 5.2 Dimension of Structure ................................ 5.3 M.2 Interface Model ................................ 5.4 M.2 Connector ................................ ............................................................................................... ............................................................................................... ............................................................................................... 5.5 Storage ................................ ............................................................................................................................... .............................................. 49 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 5 of 51 5.5.1 Storage Life ................................ ............................................................................................... 5.6 Packing ................................ ............................................................................................................................... 5.6.1 Tray Package ................................ 5.6.2 Tray size ................................ ............................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................... ................................................................... 49
............................................... 49
................................................................. 50
......................................... 51 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 6 of 51 1 Foreword 1.1 Introduction The document describes the electrical characteristics, RF performance, dimensions and application The document describes the electrical characteristics, RF performance, dimensions and application The document describes the electrical characteristics, RF performance, dimensions and application environment, etc. of L850-GL (hereinafter referred to as L850). With the assistance of the document and
(hereinafter referred to as L850). With the assistance of the document and
(hereinafter referred to as L850). With the assistance of the document and other instructions, the developers can quickly understand the hardware functions of L850 modules and other instructions, the developers can quickly understand the hardware functions of L850 modules and other instructions, the developers can quickly understand the hardware functions of L850 modules and develop products. 1.2 Reference Standard Standard The design of the product complies with The design of the product complies with the following standards:
3GPP TS 34.121-1 V10.8.0: User Equipment (UE) conformance specification;Radio transmission 1 V10.8.0: User Equipment (UE) conformance specification;Radio transmission 1 V10.8.0: User Equipment (UE) conformance specification;Radio transmission and reception (FDD);Part 1: Conformance specification and reception (FDD);Part 1: Conformance specification 3GPP TS 34.122 V10.1.0: Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; Radio 3GPP TS 34.122 V10.1.0: Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; Radio 3GPP TS 34.122 V10.1.0: Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; Radio transmission and reception (TDD) ansmission and reception (TDD) 3GPP TS 36.521-1 V10.6.0: User Equipment (UE) conformance specification; Radio transmission 1 V10.6.0: User Equipment (UE) conformance specification; Radio transmission 1 V10.6.0: User Equipment (UE) conformance specification; Radio transmission and reception; Part 1: Conformance testing and reception; Part 1: Conformance testing 3GPP TS 21.111 V10.0.0: USIM and IC card requirements 3GPP TS 21.111 V10.0.0: USIM and IC card requirements 3GPP TS 51.011 V4.15.0: Specifica 3GPP TS 51.011 V4.15.0: Specification of the Subscriber Identity Module -Mobile Equipment Mobile Equipment
(SIM-ME) interface 3GPP TS 31.102 V10.11.0: Characteristics of the Universal Subscriber Identity Module (USIM) 3GPP TS 31.102 V10.11.0: Characteristics of the Universal Subscriber Identity Module (USIM) 3GPP TS 31.102 V10.11.0: Characteristics of the Universal Subscriber Identity Module (USIM) application 3GPP TS 31.11 V10.16.0: Universal Subscriber Identity Module (USIM) Applic 3GPP TS 31.11 V10.16.0: Universal Subscriber Identity Module (USIM) Applic 3GPP TS 31.11 V10.16.0: Universal Subscriber Identity Module (USIM) Application Toolkit(USAT) 3GPP TS 36.124 V10.3.0: ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements for mobile terminals 3GPP TS 36.124 V10.3.0: ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements for mobile terminals 3GPP TS 36.124 V10.3.0: ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements for mobile terminals and ancillary equipment 3GPP TS 27.007 V10.0.8: AT command set for User Equipment (UE) 3GPP TS 27.007 V10.0.8: AT command set for User Equipment (UE) 3GPP TS 27.005 V10.0.1: Use of Data Terminal Equipme 3GPP TS 27.005 V10.0.1: Use of Data Terminal Equipment - Data Circuit terminating Equipment Data Circuit terminating Equipment
(DTE - DCE) interface for Short Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS) DCE) interface for Short Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS) DCE) interface for Short Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS) PCI Express M.2 Specification Rev1.0 PCI Express M.2 Specification Rev1.0 1.3 Related Documents Documents L850 Module Performance Testing Report L850 Module Performance Testing Report RF Antenna Application Design RF Antenna Application Design Specification L8-Family System Driver Integration and Application Guidance Family System Driver Integration and Application Guidance L8-Family AT CommandsManual Family AT CommandsManual Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 7 of 51 2 Overview 2.1 Introduction L850 is a highly integrated 4G wireless communication module that adopts standard PCIe M.2 interface L850 is a highly integrated 4G wireless communication module that adopts standard PCIe M.2 interface L850 is a highly integrated 4G wireless communication module that adopts standard PCIe M.2 interface and supports LTE FDD/LTE TDD/WCDMA/ system. It is applicable to most broadband communication supports LTE FDD/LTE TDD/WCDMA/ system. It is applicable to most broadband communication supports LTE FDD/LTE TDD/WCDMA/ system. It is applicable to most broadband communication networks of the mobile operator across the world. networks of the mobile operator across the world. 2.2 Specification Specification Operating Band Data Transmission Power Supply Temperature Physical characteristics Interface Antenna LTE FDD: Band 1,2,3,4,5,7,8,11,12,13,17,18,19,20,21,26,28,29,30,66 LTE FDD: Band 1,2,3,4,5,7,8,11,12,13,17,18,19,20,21,26,28,29,30,66 LTE FDD: Band 1,2,3,4,5,7,8,11,12,13,17,18,19,20,21,26,28,29,30,66 LTE TDD: Band 38, 39, 40, 41 LTE TDD: Band 38, 39, 40, 41 WCDMA/HSPA+: Band 1,2,4,5,8 WCDMA/HSPA+: Band 1,2,4,5,8 GNSS/Beidou: support GNSS/Beidou: support LTE FDD LTE TDD UMTS/HSPA+
UMTS/HSPA+
450Mbps DL/50Mbps UL(Cat 9) 260Mbps DL/30Mbps UL(Cat 9) When LTE TDD achieves maximum DL rate, its UL rate can When LTE TDD achieves maximum DL rate, its UL rate can reach 10Mbps only UMTS:384 kbps DL/384 kbps UL DC-HSDPA+:42Mbps DL(Cat 24)/5.76Mbps UL(Cat6) HSDPA+:42Mbps DL(Cat 24)/5.76Mbps UL(Cat6) DC 3.135V 4.4V,Typical 3.3V Normal operating temperature:-10C +55C Normal operating temperature:
Expandoperating temperature:
operating temperature:-20C +70C Storage temperature:
Storage temperature: -40C +85C Interface: M.2 Key Interface: M.2 Key-B Dimension 30 x 42 x 2.3mm Weight: About5.8 g Weight: About5.8 g WWAN Main Antenna x 1 WWAN Main Antenna x 1 WWAN Diversity Antenna x 1 WWAN Diversity Antenna x 1 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 8 of 51 Function Interface USIM 3V/1.8V 3V/1.8V USB 2.0just for debugging just for debugging PCIe 1.0 X1 W_Disable#
BodySar LED Clock Tunable antenna Tunable antenna I2S(Reserved) I2S(Reserved) I2C(Reserved) I2C(Reserved) USB3.0(not supported yet) USB3.0(not supported yet) Software Protocol Stack IPV4/IPV6 AT commands 3GPP TS 27.007 and 27.005 3GPP TS 27.007 and 27.005 Firmware update Other feature PCIe Multiple carrier Multiple carrier Windows MBIM support Windows MBIM support Windows update Windows update AGNSS Note:
For normal operating temperature, LTE FDD Band 4 and 13 can support the temperature For normal operating temperature, LTE FDD Band 4 and 13 can support the temperature For normal operating temperature, LTE FDD Band 4 and 13 can support the temperature ranging from -20 to +60 to +60. 2.3 Warnings 2.3.1 FCC Statement Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement Communication Commission Interference Statement Communication Commission Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interferenc
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interferenc
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 9 of 51 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to pr to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful ovide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:
interference by one of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circu Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution:
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an unc This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an unc This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. minimum distance 20cm between the radiator &
This equipment should be installed and operated with This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm your body. This device is intended only for OEM integrators under the following conditions:
This device is intended only for OEM integrators under the following conditions:
This device is intended only for OEM integrators under the following conditions:
1) The antenna must be installed such that 20 The antenna must be installed such that 20 cm is maintained between the antenna and cm is maintained between the antenna and dBi. users, and the maximum antenna gain allowed for use with this device is 5 dBi. users, and the maximum antenna gain allowed for use with this device is 5 The transmitter module may not be co-located with any other transmitter or antenna. antenna. 2) The transmitter module may not be co As long as 2 conditions above are met, further transmitter test will not be required. However, the OEM As long as 2 conditions above are met, further test will not be required. However, the OEM integrator is still responsible for testing their end-product for any additional compliance requirements integrator is still responsible for testing their end product for any additional compliance requirements required with this module installed Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. w All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 10 of 51 In the event that these conditions can not be met (for example certain laptop
(for example certain laptop IMPORTANT NOTE: In the event that these conditions configurations or co-location with another valid and the FCC ID can not be used be responsible for re-evaluating the end product (including the transmi authorization. another transmitter), then the FCC authorization used on the final product. In these circumstances, is no longer considered circumstances, the OEM integrator will evaluating the end product (including the transmitter) and obtaining a separate FCC tter) and obtaining a separate FCC End Product Labeling This transmitter module is authorized only for use in device where the antenna may be installed such that This transmitter module is authorized only for use in device where the antenna may be installed such that This transmitter module is authorized only for use in device where the antenna may be installed such that 20 cm may be maintained between the antenna and users. The final end product m 20 cm may be maintained between the antenna and users. The final end product must be labeled in a 20 cm may be maintained between the antenna and users. The final end product m Contains FCC ID: ZMOL850GLL. The grantee's FCC ID can be used visible area with the following: Contains FCC ID: ZMOL850GL
. The grantee's FCC ID can be used only when all FCC compliance requirements are met. only when all FCC compliance requirements are met. Manual Information To the End User Manual Information To the End User The OEM integrator has to be aware not to provide information to the end user regarding how to install or The OEM integrator has to be aware not to provide information to the end user regarding how to install or The OEM integrator has to be aware not to provide information to the end user regarding how to install or remove this RF module in the users manual of the end product which integrates this module. The end remove this RF module in the users manual of the end product which integrates this module. The end remove this RF module in the users manual of the end product which integrates this module. The end user manual shall include all required regulatory information/warning as show in this manual. user manual shall include all required regulatory information/warning as show in this manual. 2.3.2 IC Statement Industry Canada statement This device complies with Industry Canada license This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is the following two conditions:
this device may not cause interference, and 1) this device may not cause interference, 2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:
exempts de licence. L'exploitation suivantes:
l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, 2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du This device complies with RSS This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the condition device does not cause harmful Cet appareil est conforme la la norme RSS-310 d'Industrie Canada. L'opration e does not cause harmful interference. 003 du Canada. 310 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the condition that this L'opration est soumise la condition que cet appareil ne provoque aucune interfrence condition que cet appareil ne provoque aucune interfrence nuisible. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. w All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 11 of 51 This device and its antenna(s) antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except tested built antenna or transmitter, except tested built-in radios. Cet appareil et son antenne ne doivent pas tre situs ou fonctionner en conjonction avec Cet appareil et son antenne ne doivent pas tre situs ou fonctionner en conjonction avec Cet appareil et son antenne ne doivent pas tre situs ou fonctionner en conjonction avec une autre antenne ou un autre metteur, ex ception faites des radios intgres qui ont t testes. antenne ou un autre metteur, exception faites des radios intgres qui ont t The County Code Selection feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/
The County Code Selection feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/ Canada. The County Code Selection feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/
La fonction de slection de l'indicatif l'indicatif du pays est dsactive pour les produits produits commercialiss aux tats-Unis et au Canada. Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator &
equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator &
equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Dclaration d'exposition aux radiations:
Dclaration d'exposition aux radiations:
Cet quipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements IC tablies pour un Cet quipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements IC tablies pour un Cet quipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements IC tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 20 cm de environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 20 cm de environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps. re la source de rayonnement et votre corps. IC : 21374-L850GL 2.3.3 CE Statement EU Regulatory Conformance Hereby, We, Manufacturer name declares that the radio equipment type L850-GL is in compliance with Hereby, We, Manufacturer name declares that the radio equipment type L850 GL is in compliance with the Directive 2014/53/EU. In all cases assessment of the final product must be mass against the Essential requirements of the of the final product must be mass against the Essential requirements of the of the final product must be mass against the Essential requirements of the Directive 2014/53/EU Articles 3.1(a) and (b), safety and EMC respectively, as well as any relevant Article Articles 3.1(a) and (b), safety and EMC respectively, as well as any relevant Article Articles 3.1(a) and (b), safety and EMC respectively, as well as any relevant Article 3.2 requirements. The maximum antenna gain for is 5 dBi is 5 dBi and the antenna separation distance is 20cm. separation distance is 20cm. Declaration of Conformity(should include manufacturer contact info.) Declaration of Conformity(should include manufacturer contact info.) Please added certification standard in your user manual which depended on the test standards your Please added certification standard in your user manual which depended on the test standards your Please added certification standard in your user manual which depended on the test standards your device performed., If the DoC should be a simplified ve If the DoC should be a simplified version, please take below as reference, full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: http//
full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: http//
full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: http//www. fibocom.com rsion, please take below as reference, The Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. w All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 12 of 51 GL is in conformity with the relevant Union harmonization legislation: Radio Equipment directive:
harmonization legislation: Radio Equipment directive:
L850-GL is in conformity with the relevant Union 2014 / 53 / EUwith reference to the following standards applied:
2014 / 53 / EUwith reference to the following standards applied:
Health (Article 3.1(a) of Directive 2014/53/EU) Health (Article 3.1(a) of Directive 2014/53/EU) Applied Standard(s):
EN 62311 : 2008 Safety (Article 3.1(a) of Directive 2014/53/EU) Safety (Article 3.1(a) of Directive 2014/53/EU) Applied Standard(s):
EN 60950-1: 2006 + A11: 2009 + A1: 2010 + A12: 2011 + A2: 2013 1: 2006 + A11: 2009 + A1: 2010 + A12: 2011 + A2: 2013 Electromagnetic compatibility (Article 3.1 (b) of Directive 2014/53/EU) Electromagnetic compatibility (Article 3.1 (b) of Directive 2014/53/EU) Applied Standard(s):
Draft EN 301 489-1 V2.1.1 / -3 V2.1.0 /
3 V2.1.0 /-52 V1.1.0 Radio frequency spectrum usage (Article 3.2 of Directive 2014/53/EU) usage (Article 3.2 of Directive 2014/53/EU) Applied Standard(s):
Draft EN 301 511 V12.1.10 EN 301 908-1 V11.1.1 / -2 V11.1.1 /V11.1.1 2 V11.1.1 /V11.1.1 2.4 CA combination combinations CA Combinations 2CA Inter-band 1+3,5,18,19,20,21,26 2+4,5,12,13,17,29,30,66 3+5,7,8,19,20,28 4+5,12,13,17,29,30 5+7,30,66 7+20,28 12+30 13+66 29+30 Intra-band 2,3,4,7,40,41 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. w All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 13 of 51 CA Combinations 3CA 1+3+7, 1+3+19, 1+3+20, 1+19+21 1+19+21 2+4+5, 2+4+13, 2+5+30, 2+12+30, 2+29+30 2+4+5, 2+4+13, 2+5+30, 2+12+30, 2+29+30 Inter-band 3+7+20, 3+7+28 2 contiguous plus inter 2 contiguous plus inter-band 4+5+30, 4+12+30, 4+29+30 5+66+2, 13+66+2 2+2+5, 2+2+13 3+3+7, 3+7+7, 3+3+20 4+4+5, 4+4+13 5+66+66, 13+66+66, 66+66+2, 66+66+66 5+66+66, 13+66+66, 66+66+2, 66+66+66 2.5 Application Framework Framework The peripheralapplicationsfor L850 module are shown in Figure 2 The peripheralapplicationsfor L850 module are shown in Figure 2-1:
Figure2-1 Application Framework Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. w All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 14 of 51 2.6 Hardware Framework Framework The hardware framework in Figure 2 The hardware framework in Figure 2-2 shows the main hardware functions of L850 module, base band and RF functions. Baseband contains the followings:
2 shows the main hardware functions of L850 module, including GSM/UMTS/LTE FDD controller/Power supply GSM/UMTS/LTE FDD controller/Power supply NAND/internal LPDDR2 RAM NAND/internal LPDDR2 RAM Application interface RF contains the followings:
RF Transceiver RF Power/PA RF Front end RF Filter Antenna Figure 2-2 Hardware Framework 3 Application Interface Interface 3.1 M.2Interface The L850 module applies standard M.2 Key The L850 module applies standard M.2 Key-B interface, with a total of 75 pins. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. w All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 15 of 51 3.1.1 Pin Distribution Figure 3-1 Pin Distribution Note:
Pin Notch represents the gap of t Pin Notch represents the gap of the gold fingers. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. w All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 16 of 51 3.1.2 Pin Definition The pin definition is as follows:
Pin Pin Name 1 CONFIG_3 Reset Value I/O Reset Value O NC NC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+3.3V GND
+3.3V GND FUL_CARD_ POWER_OFF#
USB D+
W_DISABLE1#
9 10 USB D-
LED1#
11 GND 12 Notch 13 Notch 14 Notch 15 Notch 16 Notch 17 Notch 18 Notch 19 Notch 20 I2S_CLK 21 CONFIG_0 PI PI I I/O I I/O O PU PU PD PD T O PD PD GND GND Pin Description Type NC,L850 M.2 module is configured as NC,L850 M.2 module is configured as the WWAN PCIe,USB3.0 interface PCIe,USB3.0 interface type Power input GND Power input GND Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply enable,Module Power input,internal pull up power power on CMOS 3.3/1.8V USB Data Plus WWAN Disable,active low 0.3---3V CMOS 3.3/1.8V 0.3---3V USB Data Minus System status drain,CMOS 3.3V GND Notch Notch Notch Notch Notch Notch Notch Notch LED,Output open CMOS 3.3V Power Supply CMOS 1.8V I2S Serial clock, Reserved GND,L850 M.2 module is configured as GND,L850 M.2 module is configured as the WWAN PCIe,USB3.0 interface PCIe,USB3.0 interface type 22 I2S_RX I PD PD I2S Serial receive data, CMOS 1.8V Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. w All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 17 of 51 Pin Pin Name 23 WOWWAN#
24 I2S_TX 25 26 DPR W_DISABLE2#
27 GND 28 I2S_WA 29 USB3.0Tx 30 UIM_RESET 31 USB3.0Tx+
32 UIM_CLK 33 GND 34 UIM_DATA 35 USB3.0Rx 36 UIM_PWR 37 USB3.0Rx+
38 NC 39 GND 40 GNSS_SCL O O I I O O O O O PD PD PD PD PU PU PU PU PD PD L L I/O L I PU PU O I O O PETn0 41 42 GNSS_SDA I/O PU PU Reset Value I/O Reset Value Pin Description Reserved Wake up host I2S Serial transmit data, Reserved Body SAR Detect,active low GNSS disable,active low, Reserved GND I2S Word alignment/select, Reserved USB3.0 Transmit data minus, Not support now SIM reset signal USB3.0 Transmit data plus, Not support now SIM clock Signal GND SIM data input/output USB3.0 receive data minus, Not support now SIM power supply,3V/1.8V USB3.0 receive data plus, Not support now NC GND I2C Serial clock, Reserved PCIe TX Differential signals Negative I2C Serial data input/output, Reserved Type CMOS 1.8V CMOS 1.8V CMOS 3.3/1.8V CMOS 3.3/1.8V Power Supply CMOS 1.8V 1.8V/3V 1.8V/3V Power Supply 1.8V/3V 1.8V/3V Power Supply CMOS 1.8V CMOS 1.8V 43 PETp0 O PCIe TX Differential signals Positive PCIe TX Differential signals Positive Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. w All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 18 of 51 Pin Pin Name 44 GNSS_IRQ Reset Value I/O Reset Value PD PD I 45 GND 46 SYSCLK 47 PERn0 O I 48 TX_BLANKING O 49 PERp0 50 PERST#
51 GND 52 CLKREQ#
53 54 55 56 REFCLKN PEWAKE#
REFCLKP RFE_RFFE2_ SCLK 57 GND 58 RFE_RFFE2_ SDATA 59 ANTCTL0 60 COEX3 61 ANTCTL1 62 COEX2 I I O I O I O O O O O I PD PD PD PD T T L PD PD T Pin Description GNSS Interrupt Request, Reserved GND 26M clock output PCIe RX Differential signals Negative PA Blanking Timer PCIe RX Differential signals Positive Differential signals Positive Type CMOS 1.8V Power Supply 1.8V CMOS 1.8V PE-Reset is a functional reset to the Reset is a functional reset to the CMOS 3.3V Add-In card as defined by the PCIe Mini In card as defined by the PCIe Mini Card CEM specification GND Power Supply Clock Request is a reference clock Clock Request is a reference clock request signal as defined by the PCIe signal as defined by the PCIe CMOS 3.3V Mini Card CEM specification; Also used Mini Card CEM specification; Also used by L1 PM Substates PCIe Reference Clock signal Negative PCIe PME Wake. Open Drain with pull PCIe PME Wake. Open Drain with pull up on platform,active low PCIe Reference Clock signal Positive MIPI Interface Tunable ANT, RFFE2 clock,Open Drain output CMOS 3.3V CMOS 3.3/1.8V GND MIPI Interface Tunable ANT, RFFE2 data,Open Drain output Power Supply CMOS 3.3/1.8V Tunable ANT CTRL0 CMOS 1.8V Wireless Coexistence between WWAN Wireless Coexistence between WWAN CMOS and WiFi/BT modules. IDC_UART_TXD, and WiFi/BT modules. IDC_UART_TXD, 3.3/1.8V Reserved Tunable ANT CTRL1 Wireless Coexistence between WWAN between WWAN and WiFi/BT modules, IDC_UART_RXD IDC_UART_RXD CMOS 1.8V CMOS 1.8V Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. w All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 19 of 51 Pin Pin Name 63 ANTCTL2 64 COEX1 65 NC 66 SIM_DETECT 67 RESET#
68 NC 69 CONFIG_1 70
+3.3V 71 GND 72
+3.3V 73 GND 74 75
+3.3V CONFIG_2 Reset Value I/O Reset Value Pin Description
,Reserved Type O O I I O PI PI PI O T PD PD GND GND GND GND Tunable ANT CTRL2 Wireless Coexistence between WWAN Wireless Coexistence between WWAN and WiFi/BT modules, GNSS_EXT_FTA GNSS_EXT_FTA
,Reserved CMOS 1.8V CMOS 1.8V NC SIM Detect,internal pull up(330K), SIM Detect,internal pull up(330K), active high WWAN up(10K),active low input,internal input,internal reset NC CMOS 1.8V pull CMOS 1.8V GND,L850 M.2 module is configured as GND,L850 M.2 module is configured as the WWAN PCIe,USB3.0 interface PCIe,USB3.0 interface type Power input GND Power input GND Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply Power input GND,L850 M.2 module is configured as GND,L850 M.2 module is configured as the WWAN PCIe,USB3.0 interface PCIe,USB3.0 interface type Reset Value: The initial status after modulereset, not the status when working. Reset Value: The initial status after modulereset, not the status when working. Reset Value: The initial status after modulereset, not the status when working. H:High Voltage Level L: Low Voltage Level PD:Pull-Down PU:Pull-Up T:Tristate OD:Open Drain PP:Push-Pull PI: Power Input PO: Power Output Note:
The unused pins can be left floating. The unused pins can be left floating. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 20 of 51 3.2 Power Supply The power interface of L850 module as shown in the following table:
The power interface of L850 module as shown in the following table:
Pin Pin Description Pin Name I/O I/O 2,4,70,72,74
+3.3V 36 UIM_PWR PI PI PO PO Power supply input USIM power supply DC Parameter DC ParameterV Typical Minimum Typical Value Value Value 3.3 3.135 3.3 1.8V/3V 1.8V/3V Maximum Value 4.4 L850 module uses PCIe interface, according to the PCIe specification, the PCIe Vmain should be used as L850 module uses PCIe interface, according to the PCIe specification, the PCIe Vmain should be used as L850 module uses PCIe interface, according to the PCIe specification, the PCIe Vmain should be used as the +3.3V power source, not the Vaux. The Vaux is the PCIe backup power source and the +3.3V power source, not the Vaux. The Vaux is the PCIe backup power source and the +3.3V power source, not the Vaux. The Vaux is the PCIe backup power source and it is not sufficient as the power supply. In addition, the DC/DC power supply other than PCIe ports should not be used as as the power supply. In addition, the DC/DC power supply other than PCIe ports should not be used as as the power supply. In addition, the DC/DC power supply other than PCIe ports should not be used as the external power cannot control the module status through the PCIe protocol. the external power cannot control the module status through the PCIe protocol. 3.2.1 Power Supply The L850 module should be powered through the +3.3V pins, and the power supply design is shown in The L850 module should be powered through the +3.3V pins, and the power supply design is shown in Figure 3-2:
Figure 3-2 Power Supply Design The filter capacitor design for power supply as shown in the following The filter capacitor design for power supply as shown in the following table:
Recommended capacitance Description Application 220uF x 2 Voltage-stabilizing stabilizing capacitors 1uF,100nF Digital signal noise Digital signal noise Reduce power fluctuations of the module in Reduce power fluctuations of the module in operation, requiring capacitors with operation, requiring capacitors with low ESR. LDO or DC/DC power supply requires the LDO or DC/DC power supply requires the capacitor of no less than capacitor of no less than 440uF The capacitor for battery power supply can be The capacitor for battery power supply can reduced to 100~200uF Filter out the interference generated from the clock Filter out the interference generated from the clock and digital signals Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 21 of 51 Recommended capacitance 39pF,33pF 18pF,8.2pF,6.8pF Application 850/900 700/800, MHzfrequency band MHzfrequency band 1500/1700/1800/1900,2100/
1500/1700/1800/1900,2100/
2300,2500/2600MHzfrequen 2300,2500/2600MHzfrequen cy band Description Filter out low frequency band RF interference band RF interference medium/high Filter out interference frequency frequency RF band The stable power supply can ensure the normal operation of L850 module;and the ripple of the The stable power supply can ensure the normal operation of L850 module;and the ripple of the The stable power supply can ensure the normal operation of L850 module;and the ripple of the power supply should be less than 300mV in design. When the module operates with themaximum emission supply should be less than 300mV in design. When the module operates with themaximum emission supply should be less than 300mV in design. When the module operates with themaximum emission power, the maximum operating current can reach 1000mA, so the power source should be not lower than power, the maximum operating current can reach 1000mA, so the power source should be not lower than power, the maximum operating current can reach 1000mA, so the power source should be not lower than 3.135V, or the module may shut down or reboot. The power 3.135V, or the module may shut down or reboot. The power supply limits are shown in Figure 3 supply limits are shown in Figure 3-3:
Figure 3-3 Power Supply Limit 3.2.2 Logic level The L850module 1.8V logic level definitionas shown in the following table:
The L850module 1.8V logic level definitionas shown in the following table:
Parameters Minimum Minimum Typical Maximum Maximum 1.8V logic level VIH VIL 1.71 1.71 1.3 1.3
-
-0.3 1.8 1.8 0 1.89 1.89 0.5 The L850module 3.3V logic level definition as shown in the following table:
The L850module 3.3V logic level definition as shown in the following table:
Parameters Minimum Minimum Typical Maximum Maximum 3.3V logic level VIH VIL 3.135 3.135 2.3 2.3
-
-0.3 3.3 3.3 0 3.465 3.465 0.9 Unit V V V Unit V V V Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 22 of 51 3.2.3 Power Consumption Consumption In the condition of 3.3V power supply, the L850 power consumption as shown in the following table:
In the condition of 3.3V power supply, the L850 power consumption as shown in the following table:
In the condition of 3.3V power supply, the L850 power consumption as shown in the following table:
Average Parameter Current(mA) Condition Mode Ioff ISleep IWCDMA-RMS ILTE-RMS Power off WCDMA LTE FDD LTE TDD Radio Off WCDMA LTE FDD Power supply,module power off DRX=6 DRX=8 DRX=9 Paging cycle #64 frames (0.64 sec DRx cycle) Paging cycle #64 frames (0.64 sec DRx cycle) Paging cycle #64 frames (0.64 sec DRx cycle) Paging cycle #64 frames (0.64 sec DRx cycle) AT+CFUN=4,Flight mode WCDMA Data transfer Band 1 @+23.5dBm WCDMA Data transfer Band 2 @+23.5dBm WCDMA Data transfer Band 4 @+23.5dBm WCDMA Data transfer Band 5 @+23.5dBm WCDMA Data transfer Band 8 @+23.5dBm LTE FDD Data transfer Band 1 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data transfer Band 2 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data transfer Band 3 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data transfer Band 4 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data transfer Band 5 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data transfer Band 7 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data transfer Band 8 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data transfer Band 11 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data transfer Band 12 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data transfer Band 13 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data transfer Band 17 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data transfer Band 18 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data transfer Band 19 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data transfer Band 20 @+23dBm 0.08 2.5 1.8 1.6 2.6 2.8 1.2 680 710 500 530 580 760 760 770 710 550 TBD 540 TBD 600 560 580 560 520 630 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 23 of 51 Parameter Mode Condition Average Current(mA) LTE TDD LTE FDD Data transfer Band 21 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data transfer Band 26 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data transfer Band 28 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data transfer Band 30 @+23dBm LTE FDD Data transfer Band 66 @+23dBm LTE TDD Data transfer Band 38 @+23dBm LTE TDD Data transfer Band 39 @+23dBm LTE TDD Data transfer Band 40 @+23dBm LTE TDD Data transfer Band 41 @+23dBm TBD 540 530 TBD 700 450 320 420 440 The power consumption of L850 in 3CA mode as shown in the following tables:
The power consumption of L850 in 3CA mode as shown in the following tables:
3CA Combination Condition
(LTE FDD 3CA, Full RB) 1+3+7, 1+3+19, 1+3+20, 1+19+21 1+3+7, 1+3+19, 1+3+20, 1+19+21 2+4+5, 2+4+13, 2+5+30, 2+12+30, 2+29+30 2+4+13, 2+5+30, 2+12+30, 2+29+30 3+7+20, 3+7+28 4+5+30, 4+12+30, 4+29+30 5+66+2, 13+66+2 2+2+5, 2+2+13 3+3+7, 3+7+7, 3+3+20 4+4+5, 4+4+13 5+66+66, 13+66+66, 66+66+2, 66+66+66 5+66+66, 13+66+66, 66+66+2, 66+66+66 Band 1 @+22dBm Band 2 @+22dBm Band 3 @+22dBm Band 4 @+22dBm Band 5 @+22dBm Band 7 @+22dBm Band 12 @+22dBm Band 13 @+22dBm Band 19 @+22dBm Band 20 @+22dBm Band 21 @+22dBm Band 28 @+22dBm Band 30 @+22dBm Band 66 @+22dBm Average Current(mA) 720 880 860 760 800 1110 790 630 760 750 950 720 1330 710 Note average value obtained by testing some samples. The data above is an average value obtained by testing some samples. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 24 of 51 3.3 Control Signal The L850 module provides two control signals for power on/off and reset operations, the pin defined as The L850 module provides two control signals for power on/off and reset operations, the pin defined as The L850 module provides two control signals for power on/off and reset operations, the pin defined as shown in the following table:
Pin Pin Name I/O I/O Reset Value Functions Type FUL_CARD_POWER_ OFF#
6 I PU Power on/off signal,internalpull Power on/off signal,internalpull-up High or floating: Power on High or floating: Power on Low : Power off Reset signal, internal 10K Reset signal, internal 10K pull-up,active low 3.3/1.8V 1.8V 67 RESET#
I 3.3.1 Module Start-Up 3.3.1.1 Start-upCircuit The FUL_CARD_POWER_OFF# pin needs an external 3.3V or 1.8V pull up for booting up. The FUL_CARD_POWER_OFF# pin needs an external 3.3V or 1.8V pull up for booting up. The FUL_CARD_POWER_OFF# pin needs an external 3.3V or 1.8V pull up for booting up. The VDD_1V8 should be provided from the external circuit. AP (Application Processor) controls the module VDD_1V8 should be provided from the external circuit. AP (Application Processor) controls the module VDD_1V8 should be provided from the external circuit. AP (Application Processor) controls the module start-upand the circuit design is shown in Figure3 and the circuit design is shown in Figure3-4:
igure 3-4 Circuit for Module Start-up Controlled by AP Figure 3 up Controlled by AP 3.3.1.2 Start-upTiming Sequence Sequence After powering on, the module will start-up by pulling upthe FUL_CARD_POWER_OFF# signal for After powering on, the module will start up by pulling upthe FUL_CARD_POWER_OFF# signal for more than 20ms (100msis recommended). Meanwhile, the module will output 1.8V voltag more than 20ms (100msis recommended). Meanwhile, the module will output 1.8V voltage through more than 20ms (100msis recommended). Meanwhile, the module will output 1.8V voltag VSD2_1V8 pin and start the initialization process. The start VSD2_1V8 pin and start the initialization process. The start-up timing is shown in Figure 3 up timing is shown in Figure 3-5:
Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 25 of 51 Figure 3-5 Timing Control for Start-up Note:
The VSD2_1V8 signal is the internal PMU 1.8V output voltage which is not connected The VSD2_1V8 signal is the internal PMU 1.8V output voltage which is not connected The VSD2_1V8 signal is the internal PMU 1.8V output voltage which is not connected to the M.2 interface. The above timing of VSD2_1V8 is only for reference. interface. The above timing of VSD2_1V8 is only for reference. The RESET# is required to pull high with a ton1 delay after the +3.3V, because it takes some time The RESET# is required to pull high with a t delay after the +3.3V, because it takes some time tocharge thecapacitors for +3.3V power supply. If the +3.3V power supply is already tocharge thecapacitors for +3.3V power supply. If the +3.3V power supply is already tocharge thecapacitors for +3.3V power supply. If the +3.3V power supply is already stable before starting upthe module, the delay time can be ignored. before starting upthe module, the delay time can be ignored. 3.3.2 Module Shutdown Shutdown The module can be shut down by the following controls:
The module can be shut down by the following controls:
Shutdown Control Action Condition Software Hardware Sending AT+CPWROFF command Normal shutdown(recommend Sending AT+CPWROFF command recommend) Pull down FUL_CARD_POWER_OFF# pin FUL_CARD_POWER_OFF# pin Only used whena hardware exception occurs Only used whena hardware exception occurs and the software control cannot be used. and the software control cannot be used. The module can be shut downby sending AT+CPWROFF command. When the module receives the The module can be shut downby sending AT+CPWROFF command. When the module receives the The module can be shut downby sending AT+CPWROFF command. When the module receives the software shutdown command, the module will start the finalization process (the reverse process of software shutdown command, the module will start the finalization process (the reverse process of software shutdown command, the module will start the finalization process (the reverse process of initialization), andit will be completed after 3s. In the finalization initialization), andit will be completed after 3s. In the finalization process, the module will save the network, process, the module will save the network, SIM card and some other parameters from memory, then clear the memory and PMU will be powered off. SIM card and some other parameters from memory, then clear the memory and PMU will be powered off. SIM card and some other parameters from memory, then clear the memory and PMU will be powered off. After shutdown, the VSD2_1V8 voltage is also shut down. The software control timing isshown in Figure After shutdown, the VSD2_1V8 voltage is also shut down. The software control timing isshown in Figure After shutdown, the VSD2_1V8 voltage is also shut down. The software control timing isshown in Figure 3-6:
Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 26 of 51 Figure 3 Figure 3-6 Software Shutdown Timing Control After the software shutdown, the FUL_CARD_POWER_OFF # pin will remain high which prevents the After the software shutdown, the FUL_CARD_POWER_OFF # pin will remain high which prevents the After the software shutdown, the FUL_CARD_POWER_OFF # pin will remain high which prevents the module from restarting again. Toenable the next restart, the FUL_CARD_POWER_OFF#pin should be module from restarting again. Toenable the next restart, the FUL_CARD_POWER_OFF#pin should be module from restarting again. Toenable the next restart, the FUL_CARD_POWER_OFF#pin should be pulled low after shutting down. Note:
The VSD2_1V8 signal is the internal PMU 1.8V output voltage which is not connected to the M.2 The VSD2_1V8 signal is the internal PMU 1.8V output voltage which is not connected to the M.2 The VSD2_1V8 signal is the internal PMU 1.8V output voltage which is not connected to the M.2 interface. The above timing of VSD2_1V8 is only for reference. interface. The above timing of VSD2_1V8 is only for reference. 3.3.3 Module Reset The L850 module can reset to its initial The L850 module can reset to its initial status by pulling down the RESET# signal for more than 10ms status by pulling down the RESET# signal for more than 10ms
(100msis recommended), and the module will restart after the RESET# signal is released. When the
(100msis recommended), and the module will restart after the RESET# signal is released. When the
(100msis recommended), and the module will restart after the RESET# signal is released. When the customer executes RESET# function, the PMU remains its power inside the module. The recommended customer executes RESET# function, the PMU remains its power inside the module. The recommended customer executes RESET# function, the PMU remains its power inside the module. The recommended circuit design is shown in the Figure 3 cuit design is shown in the Figure 3-7:
The reset control timing is shown in Figure 3 The reset control timing is shown in Figure 3-8:
Figure 3 Figure 3-7 Recommended Design for Reset Circuit Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 27 of 51 Figure 3-10 Reset Timing Control Note:
RESET# is a sensitive signal, its RESET# is a sensitive signal, its recommended to add a filter capacitor close to the module. In recommended to add a filter capacitor close to the module. In case of PCB layout, the RESET# signal lines should keep away from the RF interference and case of PCB layout, the RESET# signal lines should keep away from the RF interference and case of PCB layout, the RESET# signal lines should keep away from the RF interference and protected by GND. Also, the RESET# signal lines shall neither near the PCB edge nor route on protected by GND. Also, the RESET# signal lines shall neither near the PCB edge nor route on protected by GND. Also, the RESET# signal lines shall neither near the PCB edge nor route on the surface planes to avoid module from reset caused by ESD problems. planes to avoid module from reset caused by ESD problems. planes to avoid module from reset caused by ESD problems. 3.4 USB Interface The L850 module supports USB2.0 which is compatible with USB High The L850 module supports USB2.0 which is compatible with USB High-Speed (480 Mbit/s) and USB Full Speed (480 Mbit/s) and USB Full-
Speed (12 Mbit/s). For the USB timing and electrical specification of L850 module, Speed (12 Mbit/s). For the USB timing and electrical specification of L850 module, Speed (12 Mbit/s). For the USB timing and electrical specification of L850 module, please refer toUniversal Serial Bus Specification 2.0. toUniversal Serial Bus Specification 2.0. USB interface just for debugging. 3.4.1 USB Interface Definition Definition Reset Value Pin# Pin Name Reset Value 7 Description USB Data Plus USB_D+
I/O I/O Type 0.3---3V, USB2.0 9 USB_D-
I/O USB Data Minus 0.3---3V, USB2.0 3.4.2 USB2.0 Interface Application Application USB interface is used for debugging only, so it only needs to introduce the USB interface test in hardware USB interface is used for debugging only, so it only needs to introduce the USB interface test in hardware USB interface is used for debugging only, so it only needs to introduce the USB interface test in hardware design. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 28 of 51 3.5 PCIe Interface L850 module supports PCIe 1.0 interface and one data L850 module supports PCIe 1.0 interface and one data transmission channel. After L850 module is inserted into PC, PCIe interface can, work with the drive program, map an MBIM After L850 module is inserted into PC, PCIe interface can, work with the drive program, map an MBIM After L850 module is inserted into PC, PCIe interface can, work with the drive program, map an MBIM port and a GNSS port in Win10 system. While MBIM interface is used for initiating data service in Win10 port and a GNSS port in Win10 system. While MBIM interface is used for initiating data service in Win10 port and a GNSS port in Win10 system. While MBIM interface is used for initiating data service in Win10 system and GNSS interface for receiving GNSS receiving GNSS data. 3.5.1 PCIe Interface Definition Definition Pin# Pin Name 41 Reset Value Description I/O Reset Value O PETn0 Type PCIe TX Differential signals Negative 43 47 49 53 55 50 52 54 PETP0 PERn0 PERP0 REFCLKN REFCLKP PERST#
O I I I I I CLKREQ#
O PEWAKE#
O T T L PCIe TX Differential signals Positive PCIe RX Differential signals NegativeBit0 PCIe RX Differential signals Positive PCIe Reference Clock signal Negative PCIe Reference Clock signal Positive Reset is a functional reset to the Add-In PE-Reset is a functional reset to the Add CMOS 3.3V card as defined by the PCIe Mini Card CEM defined by the PCIe Mini Card CEM specification Clock Request is a reference clock request Clock Request is a reference clock request CMOS 3.3V signal as defined by the PCIe Mini Card CEM signal as defined by the PCIe Mini Card CEM specification; Also used by L1 PM Substates specification; Also used by L1 PM Substates PCIe PME Wake. Open Drain with pull up on Wake. Open Drain with pull up on platform,active low CMOS 3.3V 3.5.2 PCIe Interface Application Application The reference circuit is shown in Figure 3 The reference circuit is shown in Figure 3-9:
Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 29 of 51 Figure 3 Figure 3-9 Reference Circuit for PCIe Interface L850 module supports one PCIe 1.0 interface, including three difference pairs: transmit pair TXP/N, L850 module supports one PCIe 1.0 interface, including three difference pairs: transmit pair TXP/N, receiving pair RXP/N and clock pair CLKP/N. receiving pair RXP/N and clock pair CLKP/N. PCIe can achieve the maximum transmission rate of 2.5 GT/s, and must strictly follow the rules below in PCIe can achieve the maximum transmission rate of 2.5 GT/s, and must strictly follow the rules below in PCIe can achieve the maximum transmission rate of 2.5 GT/s, and must strictly follow the rules below in PCB Layout:
The differential signal pair lines shall The differential signal pair lines shall be parallel and equal in length;
The differential signal pair lines shall be short if possible and be controlled within 500mm for AP end;
The differential signal pair lines shall be short if possible and be controlled within 500mm for AP end;
The differential signal pair lines shall be short if possible and be controlled within 500mm for AP end;
The impedance of differential signal pair lines is recommended to be 100 ohm, and can be The impedance of differential signal pair lines is recommended to be 100 ohm, and can be The impedance of differential signal pair lines is recommended to be 100 ohm, and can be controlled to 80120 ohm i 120 ohm in accordance with PCIe protocol;
It shall avoid the discontinuous reference ground, such as segment and space;
It shall avoid the discontinuous reference ground, such as segment and space;
It shall avoid the discontinuous reference ground, such as segment and space;
When the differential signal lines go through different layers, the via hole of grounding signal should When the differential signal lines go through different layers, the via hole of grounding signal should When the differential signal lines go through different layers, the via hole of grounding signal should rally, each pair of signals require 1-3 grounding signal via be in close to that of signal, and gene be in close to that of signal, and generally, each pair of signals require 1 holes and the lines shall never cross the segment of plane;
holes and the lines shall never cross the segment of plane;
Try to avoid bended lines and avoid introducing common Try to avoid bended lines and avoid introducing common-mode noise in the system, which will mode noise in the system, which will difference pair. As shown in Figure 3-10, the bending influence the signal integrity and EMI of influence the signal integrity and EMI of difference pair. As shown in Figure 3 angle of all lines should be equal or greater than 135 , the spacing between difference pair angle of all lines should be equal or greater than 135
, the spacing between difference pair lines should be larger than 20mil, and the line caused by bending should be greater than 1.5 lines should be larger than 20mil, and the line caused by bending should be greater than 1.5 lines should be larger than 20mil, and the line caused by bending should be greater than 1.5 times line width at least. When a serpentine line is used for length match with another line, the times line width at least. When a serpentine line is used for length match with another line, the times line width at least. When a serpentine line is used for length match with another line, the bended length of each segment shall be at least 3 times the line bended length of each segment shall be at least 3 times the line width (
width ( 3W). The largest spacing between the bended part of the serpentine line and another one of the differential lines spacing between the bended part of the serpentine line and another one of the differential lines spacing between the bended part of the serpentine line and another one of the differential lines must be less than 2 times the spacing of normal differential lines (S1<2S);
must be less than 2 times the spacing of normal differential lines (S1<2S);
must be less than 2 times the spacing of normal differential lines (S1<2S);
Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless I All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 30 of 51 Figure 3-10 Requirement of PCIe Line The difference in length of two data lines in difference pair should be within The difference in length of two data lines in difference pair should be within 5mil, and the length 5mil, and the length match is required for all parts. When the length match is conducted for the differential lines, the match is required for all parts. When the length match is conducted for the differential lines, the match is required for all parts. When the length match is conducted for the differential lines, the designed position of correct match should be close to that of incorrect match, as shown in Figure designed position of correct match should be close to that of incorrect match, as shown in Figure designed position of correct match should be close to that of incorrect match, as shown in Figure 3-11. However, there is no specific r pair, that is, the length match is only required in the internal differential lines rather than between pair, that is, the length match is only required in the internal differential lines rather than between pair, that is, the length match is only required in the internal differential lines rather than between different difference pairs. The length match should be close to the signal pin and pass different difference pairs. The length match should be close to the signal pin and pass different difference pairs. The length match should be close to the signal pin and pass the small-angle bending design. 11. However, there is no specific requirements for the length match of transmit pair and receiving equirements for the length match of transmit pair and receiving Figure 3-
-11 Length Match Design of PCIe Difference Pair 11 Length Match Design of PCIe Difference Pair 3.6 USIMInterface The L850 module has a built-in USIM card interface, which supports 1.8V and 3V SIM cards. in USIM card interface, which supports 1.8V and 3V SIM cards. in USIM card interface, which supports 1.8V and 3V SIM cards. 3.6.1 USIM Pins The USIM pins descriptionas shown in the The USIM pins descriptionas shown in the following table:
Pin Pin Name I/O I/O Reset Value Description PO PO USIM power supply 36 UIM_PWR Type 1.8V/3V Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless I All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 31 of 51 Pin Pin Name 30 UIM_RESET 32 UIM_CLK 34 UIM_DATA 66 SIM_DETECT I/O I/O Reset Value Description L L L O O I/O I/O I PD USIM reset USIM clock USIM data,internal pull up(4.7K) USIM data,internal pull up(4.7K) USIM card detect, internal 390K USIM card detect, internal 390K pull-up. Active high, and high level indicates Active high, and high level indicates SIM card is inserted; and low level SIM card is inserted; and low level indicates SIM card is detached. indicates SIM card is detached. Type 1.8V/3V 1.8V/3V 1.8V/3V 1.8V 3.6.2 USIM Interface Circuit Circuit 3.6.2.1 N.C. SIMCard Slot The reference circuit design for N.C. (Normally Closed)SIM card slot is shown in Figure 3 The reference circuit design for N.C. (Normally Closed)SIM card slot is shown in Figure 3 The reference circuit design for N.C. (Normally Closed)SIM card slot is shown in Figure 3-12:
Figure 3 Figure 3-12Reference Circuit for N.C. SIM Card Slot The principlesof theN.C.SIM card slot are described as follows:
The principlesof theN.C.SIM card slot are described as follows:
When the SIM card is detached, it connects the short circuit between CD and SW pins, and drives the is detached, it connects the short circuit between CD and SW pins, and drives the is detached, it connects the short circuit between CD and SW pins, and drives the SIM_DETECT pin low. When the SIM card is inserted, it connects an open circuit between CD and SW pins, and drives the When the SIM card is inserted, it connects an open circuit between CD and SW pins, and drives the When the SIM card is inserted, it connects an open circuit between CD and SW pins, and drives the SIM_DETECT pin high. 3.6.2.2 N.O. SIM Card Slot circuit design for N.O. (Normally Open) SIM card slot is shown in Figure 3 The reference circuit design for N.O. (Normally Open) SIM card slot is shown in Figure 3 circuit design for N.O. (Normally Open) SIM card slot is shown in Figure 3-13:
Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless I All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 32 of 51 Figure 3-13 13 Reference Circuit for N.O. SIM Card Slot The principlesof theN.O.SIM card slot are described as The principlesof theN.O.SIM card slot are described as follows:
When the SIM card is detached, it con When the SIM card is detached, it connects an open circuit between CD and SW pins, and drives nects an open circuit between CD and SW pins, and drives the SIM_DETECT pin low. the SIM_DETECT pin low. When the SIM card is inserted, inserted, it connects the short circuit between CD and SW pins, and drives the SIM_DETECT pin high. 3.6.3 USIM Hot-Plugging Plugging The L850 module supports the SIM card hot-plugging function, which determines whether the SIM card is The L850 module supports the SIM plugging function, which determines whether the SIM card is inserted or detached by detecting the SIM_DETECT pin state of the SIM card slot. inserted or detached by detecting the SIM_DETECT pin state of the SIM card slot. inserted or detached by detecting the SIM_DETECT pin state of the SIM card slot. The SIM card hot-plugging function can be configuredby AT+MSMPD command, and the description for plugging function can be configuredby AT+MSMPD command, and the description for plugging function can be configuredby AT+MSMPD command, and the description for AT command as shown in the following table:
AT command as shown in the following table:
AT Command Function Description Hot-plugging Detection Enable AT+MSMPD=1 AT+MSMPD=0 Disable Default value, the SIM card hot-plugging detection function is plugging detection function is enabled. The module can detect whether the SIM card is inserted or not The module can detect whether the SIM card is inserted or not through the SIM_DETECT pin state. The SIM card hot-plugging detect function is disabled. plugging detect function is disabled. The module readsthe SIM card when starting up, and the when starting up, and the SIM_DETECT status will not be detected. SIM_DETECT status will not be detected. After the SIM card hot-plugging detection functionis enabled, the module detects that the SIM card is plugging detection functionis enabled, the module detects that the SIM card is plugging detection functionis enabled, the module detects that the SIM card is insertedwhen the SIM_DETECT pin is high, then executes the initialization program and finish the insertedwhen the SIM_DETECT pin is high, then executes the initialization program and finish the insertedwhen the SIM_DETECT pin is high, then executes the initialization program and finish the Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless I All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 33 of 51 network registration after reading the SIM card information. When the SIM_DETECT pin is low, the network registration after reading the SIM ca rd information. When the SIM_DETECT pin is low, the module determines that the SIM card is detachedand does not read the SIM card. module determines that the SIM card is detachedand does not read the SIM card. module determines that the SIM card is detachedand does not read the SIM card. Note:
By default, SIM_DETECT is active By default, SIM_DETECT is active-high, which can be switched to active command. Please refer to the AT CommandsManual for the AT command. command. Please refer to the AT CommandsManual for the AT command. high, which can be switched to active-low by the AT 3.6.4 USIM Design The SIM card circuit design shall meet the EMC standards and ESD requirements with the The SIM card circuit design shall meet the EMC standards and ESD requirements with the The SIM card circuit design shall meet the EMC standards and ESD requirements with the improvedcapability to resist interference, to ensure that the SIM card can work stably. Thefollowing improvedcapability to resist interference, to ensure that the SIM card can work stably. Thefollowing improvedcapability to resist interference, to ensure that the SIM card can work stably. Thefollowing guidelines should be noted in case of design:
be noted in case of design:
The SIM card slotplacement should near the module as close as possible, and away from the RF The SIM card slotplacement should near the module as close as possible, and away from the RF The SIM card slotplacement should near the module as close as possible, and away from the RF antenna, DC/DC power supply, clock signal lines, and other strong interference sources. antenna, DC/DC power supply, clock signal lines, and other strong interference sources. antenna, DC/DC power supply, clock signal lines, and other strong interference sources. The SIM card slot with a metal shielding The SIM card slot with a metal shielding housing can improve the anti-interference ability. interference ability. The trace length between the SIM card slotand the module should not exceed 100mm, or it could The trace length between the SIM card slotand the module should not exceed 100mm, or it could The trace length between the SIM card slotand the module should not exceed 100mm, or it could reduce the signal quality. The UIM_CLK and UIM_DATA signal lines should be isolated by GND to avoid crosstalk The UIM_CLK and UIM_DATA signal lines should be isolated by GND to avoid crosstalk The UIM_CLK and UIM_DATA signal lines should be isolated by GND to avoid crosstalk interference. If it is difficult for the layout, the whole SIM signal lines should be wrapped with interference. If it is difficult for the layout, the whole SIM signal lines should be wrapped with interference. If it is difficult for the layout, the whole SIM signal lines should be wrapped with GND as a group at least. The filter capacitors and ESDdevices for SIM card signals should be placed near to the SIM card The filter capacitors and ESDdevices for SIM card signals should be placed near to the SIM card The filter capacitors and ESDdevices for SIM card signals should be placed near to the SIM card slot, and the ESD devices with 22~
slot, and the ESD devices with 22~33pF capacitance should be used. 3.7 Status Indicator Indicator The L850 module providesthree signals to indicate the operating status of the module, and the status The L850 module providesthree signals to indicate the operating status of the module, and the status The L850 module providesthree signals to indicate the operating status of the module, and the status indicator pinsas shown in the following table:
indicator pinsas shown in the following table:
Pin I/O Reset Value Reset Value Pin Description Pin Name Type 10 LED1#
23 WOWWAN#
48 TX_BLANKING O O O PD PU PD System status LED, drain output. Module wakes upHost (AP). output, externalGPS control PA Blanking output, externalGPS control signal. CMOS 3.3V CMOS 1.8V CMOS 1.8V Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless I All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 34 of 51 3.7.1 LED#1Signal The LED#1 signal is used to indicate the operating status of the module, and the detailed description as The LED#1 signal is used to indicate the operating status of the module, and the detailed description as The LED#1 signal is used to indicate the operating status of the module, and the detailed description as shown in the following table:
Module Status RF function ON RF function OFF LED1#
LED1# Signal Low level (LED On) Low level (LED On) High level (LED Off) High level (LED Off) The LED driving circuit is as follows:
follows:
Figure 3-14 LEDDriving Circuit Note:
The resistance of LED current-limiting resistor is selected according to the driving voltage and The resistance of LED current limiting resistor is selected according to the driving voltage and the driving current. 3.7.2 WOWWAN#
The WOWWAN# signal is used to wake the Host (AP) when there comes the data request.The definition The WOWWAN# signal is used to wake the Host (AP) when there comes the data request.The definition The WOWWAN# signal is used to wake the Host (AP) when there comes the data request.The definition of WOWWAN# signal is as follows:
of WOWWAN# signal is as follows:
Operating Mode WOWWAN# Signal WOWWAN# Signal data requests Idle/Sleep Pull low 1s then pull high (pulse Pull low 1s then pull high (pulse signal). High level High level The WOWWAN# timing is shown in Figure 3 The WOWWAN# timing is shown in Figure 3-15:
Figure 3-15 WOWWAN#Timing Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless I All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 35 of 51 3.7.3 TX_BLANKING When the module operates in LTE TDD Band 39, TX_BLANKING outputs the pulse signal synchronous When the module operates in LTE TDD Band 39, TX_BLANKING outputs the pulse signal synchronous When the module operates in LTE TDD Band 39, TX_BLANKING outputs the pulse signal synchronous with TDD burst TX timing. As TDD TX may interfere the receiving of GPS signal, AP will disable GPS or stop GPS data receiving As TDD TX may interfere the receiving of GPS signal, AP will disable GPS or stop GPS data receiving As TDD TX may interfere the receiving of GPS signal, AP will disable GPS or stop GPS data receiving when detecting TX_BLANKING pulse signal, so as to avoid abnormal operation of GPS. when detecting TX_BLANKING pulse signal, so as to avoid abnormal operation of GPS. when detecting TX_BLANKING pulse signal, so as to avoid abnormal operation of GPS. Operating Mode of Module TX_BLANKING Signal Default state Low level TDD burst TX(Band38) Output the pulse signal synchronous with TDD burst TX pulse signal synchronous with TDD burst TX TX_BLANKING timing is shown in Figure 3 s shown in Figure 3-16:
Figure 3-16 TX_BLANKING Timing 3.8 Interrupt Control Control The L850 module provides four interrupt signals, and the pin definition is as follows:
The L850 module provides four interrupt signals, and the pin definition is as follows:
The L850 module provides four interrupt signals, and the pin definition is as follows:
Pin Pin Name Reset Value Pin Description I/O 8 W_DISABLE1#
25 DPR 26 44 W_DISABLE2#
GNSS_IRQ I I I I PD PU PU PD 3.8.1 W_DISABLE1#
Enable/Disable RF network Body SAR detection GNSS Disablesignal, Reserved GNSS Interrupt Request, Reserved Type CMOS 3.3V CMOS 1.8V CMOS 1.8V CMOS 1.8V The module provides a hardware pin to enable/disable WWAN RF function, and the function can also be The module provides a hardware pin to enable/disable WWAN RF function, and the function can also be The module provides a hardware pin to enable/disable WWAN RF function, and the function can also be controlled by the AT command. The controlled by the AT command. The module enters the Flight mode afterthe RF function is disabled. The module enters the Flight mode afterthe RF function is disabled. The definition of W_DISABLE1# signal is as follows:
definition of W_DISABLE1# signal is as follows:
W_DISABLE1# signal Function Function WWAN function is enabled, the module exits the Flight mode. WWAN High/Floating function is enabled, the module exits the Flight mode. WWAN function is disabled, the module entersFlight mode. Low WWAN function is disabled, the module entersFlight mode. WWAN function is disabled, the module entersFlight mode. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless I All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 36 of 51 Note The function of W_DISABLE1# can be customized, please refer to the software porting guide. The function of W_DISABLE1# can be customized, please refer to the software porting guide. The function of W_DISABLE1# can be customized, please refer to the software porting guide. 3.8.2 BODYSAR sensor detects the closing human body, the DPR signal The L850 module supportsBody SARfunction by detecting the DPR pin. The voltage level of DPR is high The L850 module supportsBody SARfunction by detecting the DPR pin. The voltage level of DPR is high The L850 module supportsBody SARfunction by detecting the DPR pin. The voltage level of DPR is high by default, and when the SAR sensor signal will be pulled down. As the result, the module then lowers down its emission power to its default threshold value, thus As the result, the module then lowers down its emission power to its default threshold value, thus As the result, the module then lowers down its emission power to its default threshold value, thus reducing theRF radiation onthe human body. The threshol reducing theRF radiation onthe human body. The threshold of emission power can be set by the Commands. The definition ofDPR signalas shown in the following Commands. The definition ofDPR signalas shown in the following table:
DPR signal d of emission power can be set by the AT Function Function High/Floating The module keeps the default emission power The module keeps the default emission power Low Lower the maximum emission power to the threshold value of the module. Lower the maximum emission power to the threshold value of the module. Lower the maximum emission power to the threshold value of the module. 3.9 ClockInterface The L850 module supports a clock interface, itcan output 26MHz clock. The L850 module supports a clock interface, itcan output 26MHz clock. Pin 46 I/O Reset Value Reset Value O Pin Name SYSCLK Pin Description 26M clock output, default disabled 26M clock output, default disabled can be used for externalGPS, etc can be used for externalGPS, etc Type 1.8V 3.10 ANT Tunable Interface Interface The module supports ANT Tunable interfaces with two different The module supports ANT Tunable interfaces with two different control modes, i.e. MIPI interface and 3bit control modes, i.e. MIPI interface and 3bit GPO interface. Through cooperating with external antenna adapter switch via ANT Tunable, it can flexibly GPO interface. Through cooperating with external antenna adapter switch via ANT Tunable, it can flexibly GPO interface. Through cooperating with external antenna adapter switch via ANT Tunable, it can flexibly configure the bands of LTE antenna to improve the antennas working efficiency and save space for the configure the bands of LTE antenna to improve the antennas working efficiency and save space for the configure the bands of LTE antenna to improve the antennas working efficiency and save space for the antenna. Pin Pin Name 56 Reset Value Pin Description I/O Reset Value O Type Tunable ANT control,MIPI Interface, Tunable ANT control,MIPI Interface, RFFE2 clock,Open Drain output RFE_RFFE2_ SCLK CMOS 3.3/1.8V 58 RFE_RFFE2_ SDATA 59 ANTCTL0 O O Tunable ANT control,MIPI Interface, Tunable ANT control,MIPI Interface, RFFE2 data,Open Drain output CMOS 3.3/1.8V Tunable ANT control,GPO interface, Tunable ANT control,GPO interface, CMOS 1.8V Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless I All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 37 of 51 Pin Pin Name 61 63 ANTCTL1 ANTCTL2 I/O Reset Value Reset Value Pin Description Bit0 O O Tunable ANT control,GPO interface, Tunable ANT control,GPO interface, bit1 Tunable ANT control,GPO interface, Tunable ANT control,GPO interface, Bit2 Type CMOS 1.8V CMOS 1.8V 3.11 Config Interface Interface The L850 module provides four config pins for the configuration as the WWAN-PCIe, USB3.0 type M.2 The L850 module provides four config pins for the PCIe, USB3.0 type M.2 module:
Pin Pin Description Pin Name I/O Reset Value Reset Value 1 21 69 75 CONFIG_3 CONFIG_0 CONFIG_1 CONFIG_2 O O L O L O L NC Internally connected to GND Internally connected to GND Internally connected to GND Type The M.2 module configuration as the following table:
The M.2 module configuration as the following table:
Config_3
(pin1) Config_1
(pin69) Config_0
(pin21) Config_2 Config_2
(pin75)
(pin75) Module Type and Main Module Type and Main Port Host Interface Configuration GND GND GND GND NC WWAN PCIe,USB3.0 0 Please refer to PCI Express M.2 Specification Rev1.0 for more details. Please refer to PCI Express M.2 Specification Rev1.0 for more details. 3.12 Other Interfaces Interfaces The module does not support other interfaces yet. The module does not support other interfaces yet. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless I All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 38 of 51 4 Radio Frequency Frequency 4.1 RF Interface 4.1.1 RF Interface Functionality Functionality The L850 module supports two RF connectors used for external antenna connection. As the Figure 4 module supports two RF connectors used for external antenna connection. As the Figure 4 module supports two RF connectors used for external antenna connection. As the Figure 4-1 shows, M is for Main antenna, used to receive and transmit RF signals; D/G is for Diversity antenna, shows, M is for Main antenna, used to receive and transmit RF signals; D/G is for Diversity antenna, shows, M is for Main antenna, used to receive and transmit RF signals; D/G is for Diversity antenna, used to receive the diversity RF signals. used to receive the diversity RF signals. Figure 4-1 RF connectors 4.1.2 RFConnector Characteristic Characteristic Rated Condition Environment Condition Environment Condition Frequency Range DC to 6GHz DC to 6GHz Temperature Range Characteristic Impedance 50 50 40C to +85C 4.1.3 RF Connector Dimension Dimension The L850 module adopts standard M.2 module RF connectors, the model name is The L850 module adopts standard M.2 module RF connectors, the model name is The L850 module adopts standard M.2 module RF connectors, the model name is 818004607 from ECT company, and the connector size is 2*2*0.6m. The connector dimension is shown as following picture:
company, and the connector size is 2*2*0.6m. The connector dimension is shown as following picture:
company, and the connector size is 2*2*0.6m. The connector dimension is shown as following picture:
Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless I All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 39 of 51 Figure 4 Figure 4-2 RF connector dimensions Figure 4 Figure 4-3 0.81mm coaxial antenna dimensions Figure 4-4 Schematic diagram of 0.81mm coaxial antenna connected to the RF connector 4 Schematic diagram of 0.81mm coaxial antenna connected to the RF connector 4 Schematic diagram of 0.81mm coaxial antenna connected to the RF connector Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 40 of 51 Band 1 Band 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 5 Band 7 Band 8 Band 11 Band 12 Band 13 Band 17 4.2 Operating Band Band The L850 module operating bands of the antennas are as follows:
The L850 module operating bands of the antennas are as follows:
Operating Band Description Mode Tx (MHz) IMT 2100MHz LTE FDD/WCDMA 1920 - 1980 PCS 1900MHz LTE FDD/WCDMA 1850 - 1910 DCS 1800MHz LTE FDD 1710 - 1785 AWS 1700MHz LTE FDD/WCDMA 1710 - 1755 CLR 850MHz LTE FDD/WCDMA 824 - 849 Rx (MHz) 2110 - 2170 1930 - 1990 1805 - 1880 2110 - 2155 869 - 894 IMT-E 2600Mhz LTE FDD 2500 - 2570 2620 - 2690 E-GSM 900MHz LTE FDD/WCDMA 880 - 915 925 - 960 LPDC 1500MHz LSMH Blocks A/B/C LSMH Blocks A/B/C 700MHz USMH Block C 700MHz LSMH Blocks B/C 700MHz LTE FDD LTE FDD LTE FDD LTE FDD Band 18 Japan Lower 800MHz Japan Lower 800MHz LTE FDD Band 19 Japan Upper 800MHz Japan Upper 800MHz LTE FDD Band 20 EUDD 800MHz LTE FDD 1427.9 - 1447.9 699 - 716 1475.9 - 1495.9 729 - 746 777 - 787 704 - 716 815 - 830 830 - 845 832 - 862 746 - 756 734 - 746 860 - 875 875 - 890 791 - 821 Band 21 UPDC 1500MHz LTE FDD 1447.9 - 1462.9 1495.9 - 1510.9 Band 26 ECLR 850MHz Band 28 Band 29 Band 30 APAC 700MHz LSMH blocks D/E 700MHz WCS blocks A 2300MHz LTE FDD LTE FDD LTE FDD LTE FDD 814 - 849 703 - 748 N/A 859 - 894 758 - 803 716 - 728 2305 - 2315 2350 - 2360 Band 66 1700MHz LTE FDD 1710 - 1780 2110 - 2200 Band 38 IMT-E 2600MHz LTE TDD 2570 2570 - 2620 Band 39 TDD 1900MHZ 1880 1880 - 1920 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization LTE TDD L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 41 of 51 Operating Band Description Mode Tx (MHz) Rx (MHz) Band 40 IMT 2300MHz LTE TDD BRS/EBS 2500MHZ BRS/EBS 2500MHZ LTE TDD Band 41 GPS L1 GLONASS L1 BeiDou 4.3 Transmitting Power Power 2300 2300 - 2400 2496 2496 - 2690 1575.421.023 1602.56254 1561.0982.046 N/A N/A N/A The transmitting power foreach band of the L850 moduleas shown in the following table:
The transmitting power foreach band of the L850 moduleas shown in the following table:
The transmitting power foreach band of the L850 moduleas shown in the following table:
Mode Tx Power(dBm) Band Note WCDMA LTE FDD Band 1 Band 2 Band 4 Band 5 Band 8 Band 1 Band 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 5 Band 7 Band 8 Band 11 Band 12 Band 13 Band 17 Band 18 Band 19 Band 20 23.51 23.51 23.51 23.51 23.51 231 231 231 231 231 231 231 231 231 231 231 231 231 231 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 42 of 51 Mode LTE TDD Band Band 21 Band 26 Band 28 Band 30 Band 66 Band 38 Band 39 Band 40 Band 41 Tx Power(dBm) Note 231 231 231 231 231 231 231 231 231 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 10MHz 10MHz Bandwidth, 1 RB 4.4 Receiver Sensitivity Sensitivity The receiver sensitivity foreach band of the L850 module as shown in the following table:
The receiver sensitivity foreach band of the L850 module as shown in the following table:
The receiver sensitivity foreach band of the L850 module as shown in the following table:
Rx Sensitivity(dBm) Mode Band WCDMA LTE FDD Band 1 Band 2 Band 4 Band 5 Band 8 Band 1 Band 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 5 Band 7 Band 8 Band 11 Band 12 Band 13 Typical TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD Note BER<0.1%
BER<0.1%
BER<0.1%
BER<0.1%
BER<0.1%
BER<0.1%
BER<0.1%
BER<0.1%
BER<0.1%
BER<0.1%
10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth Band 17 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization All Rights Reserved. TBD L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 43 of 51 Mode Band Rx Sensitivity(dBm) Typical Note Band 18 Band 19 Band 20 Band 21 Band 26 Band 28 Band 29 Band 30 Band 66 Band 38 Band 39 Band 40 Band 41 LTE TDD Note:
TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth 10MHz Bandwidth The above values are measuredfor the dual antennas situation(Main+Diversity). For single main The above values are measuredfor the dual antennas situation(Main+Diversity). For single main The above values are measuredfor the dual antennas situation(Main+Diversity). For single main antenna (without Diversity), the sensitivity will drop around 3dBm for each band of LTE. antenna (without Diversity), the sensitivity will drop around 3dBm for each band of LTE. 4.5 GNSS L850 module supports GNSS/BeiDou and AGNSS functions, and adopts RF Diversity and GNSS/Beidou L850 module supports GNSS/BeiDou and AGNSS functions, and adopts RF Diversity and GNSS/Beidou integrated antenna. Description Test Result Test Result Condition Power GPS fixing GPS tracking GLONASS fixing GLONASS tracking BeiDou fixing BeiDou tracking Sleep TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 44 of 51 Description TTFF Condition Cold start GPS/GLONASS/BeiDou GPS/GLONASS/BeiDou Warm start AGNSS GPS Sensitivity GLONASS BeiDou Note:
Hot Start Cold start Open Sky Open Sky Open Sky Test Result Test Result TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD Please note that GPS current is tested with RF disabled. Please note that GPS current is tested with RF disabled. 4.6 Antenna Design Design The L850module provides main and diversity antenna interfaces, and the antenna design requirements The L850module provides main and diversity antenna interfaces, and the antenna design requirements as shown in the following table:
L850 module Main antenna requirements L850 module Main antenna requirements Frequency range Bandwidth(WCDMA) Bandwidth(LTE) The most proper antenna to adapt the frequencies should The most proper antenna to adapt the frequencies should be used. WCDMA band 1(2100) : 250 MHz WCDMA band 2(1900) : 140 MHz WCDMA band 4(1700) : 445 MHz WCDMA band 5(850) : 70 MHz WCDMA band 8(900) : 80 MHz 250 MHz LTE band 1(2100):
140MHz LTE band 2(1900):
170 MHz LTE Band 3(1800):
445MHz LTE band 4(1700):
70 MHz LTE band 5(850):
190 MHz LTE band 7(2600):
LTE Band 8(900):
80 MHz LTE Band 11(1500): 68 MHz LTE Band 12(700):
47 MHz 41 MHz LTE Band 13(700):
Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 45 of 51 L850 module Main antenna requirements L850 module Main antenna requirements LTE Band 17(700): 42 MHz LTE Band 18(800): 80 MHz LTE Band 19(800): 80 MHz LTE band 20(800): 71 MHz LTE band 21(1500): 63 MHz LTE band 26(850): 80 MHz LTE band 28(700): 100 MHz LTE band 29(700): 12 MHz LTE band 30(2300): 55 MHz LTE band 66(1700): 490MHz LTE band 38(2600): 50 MHz LTE Band 39(1900): 40 MHz LTE band 40(2300): 100 MHz LTE band 41(2500): 194 MHz Bandwidth(GNSS/BeiDou) Impedance Input power GPS: 2MHz GLONASS: 8MHz BeiDou: 4MHz 50Ohm
> 26dBmaverage power WCDMA & LTE Recommended standing-wave ratio (SWR) 2:1 Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 46 of 51 5 Structure Specification Specification 5.1 Product Appearance Appearance The product appearance for L850 module is shown in Figure5 The product appearance for L850 module is shown in Figure5-1:
Figure 5-1 Module Appearance 5.2 Dimension of Structure Structure The structuraldimensionof the L850 module is shown in Figure 5 The structuraldimensionof the L850 module is shown in Figure 5-2:
Figure 5-2 Dimension of Structure Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 47 of 51 5.3 M.2 Interface Model Model The L850 M.2 module adopts 75-pin gold finger as external interface, where 67 pins are signal pins and 8 pin gold finger as external interface, where 67 pins are signal pins and 8 pin gold finger as external interface, where 67 pins are signal pins and 8 1. For module dimension, please refer to chapter 5.2. Based on pins are notch pins as shown in Figure 3 pins are notch pins as shown in Figure 3-1. For module dimension, please refer to chapter the M.2 interface definition, L850 module adopts Type 3042 on, L850 module adopts Type 3042-S3-B interface (30x42mm, the component B interface (30x42mm, the component maximum height on t top layer is 1.5mm, PCB thickness is 0.8mm, and KEY ID is B). maximum height on t top layer is 1.5mm, PCB thickness is 0.8mm, and KEY ID is B). maximum height on t top layer is 1.5mm, PCB thickness is 0.8mm, and KEY ID is B). 5.4 M.2 Connector The L850 module connects to AP via M.2 connector, it is recommended to use M.2 conn The L850 module connects to AP via M.2 connector, it is recommended to use M.2 conn The L850 module connects to AP via M.2 connector, it is recommended to use M.2 connector from LOTES company with the model APCI0026-P001A as shown in Figure 5-3. The package of connector, LOTES company with the model APCI0026 3. The package of connector, please refer to the specification. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 48 of 51 Figure 5 Figure 5-3 M.2 Dimension of Structure 5.5 Storage 5.5.1 Storage Life Storage Conditions (recommended): Temperature is 23 5 Storage Conditions (recommended): Temperature is 23 5 , relative humidity is RH 35 Storage period (sealed vacuum packing): Under the recommended storage conditions, the storage life is Storage period (sealed vacuum packing): Under the recommended storage conditions, the storage life is Storage period (sealed vacuum packing): Under the recommended storage conditions, the storage life is 12 months.
, relative humidity is RH 35-70%. 5.6 Packing The L850 module uses the tray sealed vacu The L850 module uses the tray sealed vacuum packing, combined with the outer packing method using um packing, combined with the outer packing method using the hard cartoon box, so that the storage, transportation and the usage of modules can be protected to the hard cartoon box, so that the storage, transportation and the usage of modules can be protected to the hard cartoon box, so that the storage, transportation and the usage of modules can be protected to the greatest extent. Note The module is a precision electronic product, and may suffer permanent damage if no correct The module is a precision electronic product, and may suffer permanent damage if no correct electrostatic protection measures are taken. electrostatic protection measures are taken. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 49 of 51 5.6.1 Tray Package The L850 module uses tray package,20 pcs are packed in each tray, with 5 trays in each box and 6 boxes The L850 module uses tray package,20 pcs are packed in each tray, with 5 trays in each box and 6 boxes The L850 module uses tray package,20 pcs are packed in each tray, with 5 trays in each box and 6 boxes in each case. Tray packaging process is shown in each case. Tray packaging process is shown in Figure 5-4:
Figure 5-4 Tray Packaging Process Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 50 of 51 5.6.2 Tray size The pallet size is 330*175*6.0mm, as shown in Figure 5 pallet size is 330*175*6.0mm, as shown in Figure 5-5:
ITEM DIM ITEM DIM ITEM DIM L W H T A0 B0 330.00.5 175.00.5 175.00.5 6.00.3 0.50.1 430.3 430.3 33.00.3 A1 B1 B1 C D E F 294.00.3 159.00.3 159.00.3 20.00.5 9.00.5 24.50.5 24.50.5 187.50.2 G J 105.00.2 9.00.2 9.00.2 Figure 5-5Tray Size (Unit: mm) Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization - All Rights Reserved. Reproduction forbidden without Fibocom Wireless Inc. written authorization All Rights Reserved. L850-GL Hardware User Manual Page 51 of 51
1 2 3 4 5 | Internal Photos | Internal Photos | 661.66 KiB | February 21 2022 / August 21 2022 | delayed release |
1 2 3 4 5 | External Photos | External Photos | 1.60 MiB | October 14 2020 / April 24 2021 | delayed release |
1 2 3 4 5 | Label Info | ID Label/Location Info | 605.93 KiB | October 14 2020 / October 26 2020 |
FCC E-Label Information A. Information to be displayed 1. The information that will be displayed on the e-label and information that will remain in the user manual is shown below:
Information FCC ID number FCC logo 15.19 statement (This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.) on E-label Yes Yes No In Manual Yes Yes Yes Images of the e-label screen are provided below:
Contains FCC ID:ZMOL850GLL, IC: 21374-L850GL Contains FCC ID:PD9AX201D2, IC: 1000M-AX201D2 1 2 B. Access to the required information on the e-label 1. Users must be able to access No special access codes or permissions are required to go through the above steps beyond entering a user-defined password to protect against unauthorized access to the device. The information to the user is provided in the user manual. the regulatory information without requiring special access codes or permissions, and in all cases the information must be accessible in no more than three steps from a products main or home menu. 2. Instructions must be provided with the product at the time of purchase, in the user manual, operating instructions, packaging material, quick guide pamphlet, etc. Alternatively, a product-related website is permitted, if a reference
(URL) to obtain the website information is provided at the time of purchase in the user manual, operating instructions, packaging material, quick guide pamphlet, etc. special accessories or supplemental plug-ins (e.g., the installation of a SIM/USIM card) to access the information. Access to regulatory information must be provided without special codes, accessories, or permissions beyond the normal security protection to unlock the screen, sign-in page, or overall product access. 4. The FCC ID, warning statements, or other information must be displayed electronically in a manner that is clearly legible without the aid of magnification. and dedicated exclusive application(s) or script(s) must be secured and 3. Products must not require The devices do not require special code, accessories or supplemental plug-
ins to access the information. Yes, it is clearly legible without the aid of magnification. 5. Both regulatory information Yes, it is secured and the user cannot modify it. 3 The FCC logo, FCC ID, and model number are present on the product packaging. implemented in a factory-
set-unalterable format. The regulatory information must be capable of being retrieved and displayed locally, and under the control of the end user in possession of the product. The method must be secure, such that the application or script ensures that the regulatory information correctly displayed. C. Labeling for Importation and Purchasing 1. When e-labeling is used, a physical temporary label is also required on the product, or a label on the packaging, at the time of importation, marketing, and sales.8 The physical label can be a summary version of the required regulatory information, such that the product can be identified as complying with the FCCs equipment authorization requirements. The information may simply be the FCC ID for products subject to certification. Products imported that are already packaged for sale and have a physical temporary label will satisfy this requirement. However, for products imported in bulk and not packaged individually, it is acceptable to use a temporary removable adhesive label on the product, or temporary or permanent labels on the shipping packaging or protective bags. Any removable adhesive label shall be of a type intended to survive normal shipping and handling. 4
1 2 3 4 5 | CIIPC Declaration letter for | Cover Letter(s) | 321.10 KiB | February 21 2022 / February 22 2022 |
Fibocom Wireless Inc. 1101, Tower A, Building 6, Shenzhen International Innovation Valley, Dashi 1st Rd, Nanshan, Shenzhen, China. Date: February 17, 2022 FCC CIIPC Declaration FCC ID: ZMOL850GLL We, Fibocom Wireless Inc., hereby declare that we are only and fully responsible for this CIIPC application of FCC ID: ZMOL850GLL, originally granted on 01/31/2019 . Now we would like to add the following material manufacturing plant for our business issue and marketing requirement. The specifications of new and old materials are the same. Details are as follows:
1. Add new SPDT supplier for LTE band 30, model name: MXD8625EH, manufacturerMAXSCEND. The electrical characteristic is the same with before, there is no impact for performance. _________________________ Lucy Liu / Certification Manager Fibocom Wireless Inc. Tel.: +86-755-26525092 E-mail: lucy.liu@fibocom.com 1101, Tower A, Building 6, Shenzhen International Innovation Valley, Dashi 1st Rd, Nanshan, Shenzhen, China. Except for the changes mentioned above, no other modification is performed. Also, the change does not have any impact on the approved radio parameter such as power, frequency range, modulation etc. Should you have any question, please contact me directly. Sincerely, _________________________ Lucy Liu / Certification Manager Fibocom Wireless Inc. Tel.: +86-755-26525092 E-mail: lucy.liu@fibocom.com
1 2 3 4 5 | Power of Attorney Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 8.14 KiB | February 21 2022 / February 22 2022 |
Fibocom Wireless Inc. 1101, Tower A, Building 6, Shenzhen International Innovation Valley, Dashi 1st Rd, Nanshan, Shenzhen, China. Power of Attorney Date: January 22, 2022 To whom it may concern, other documentation. Please be notified that I, Lucy Liu, have designated Joey Lao of Bureau Veritas 7Layers Communications Technology (Shenzhen) Co. Ltd as the person being responsible for this project and to sign the form 731 and Any and all acts carried out by Joey Lao of Bureau Veritas 7Layers Communications Technology (Shenzhen) Co. Ltd on the matters relating to all processes required in the FCC approval and any communication needed with the national authority, shall have the same legal authority as acts on our own behalf. As defined in 47 CFR Ch. 1.U.S.C 862, we further certify that neither the applicant nor any party to this application is subject to a denial to Federal benefits, including FCC benefits, pursuant to section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act. This authorization is limited to the product of as following:
FCC ID: ZMOL850GLL If you have any acknowledgement and response, please send it to Joey Lao of Bureau Veritas 7Layers Communications Technology (Shenzhen) Co. Ltd directly. Should you have any question or comment regarding this matter, please have my best attention. Sincerely yours, ___________________________________ Lucy Liu / Certification Manager Fibocom Wireless Inc. Tel.: +86-755-26525092 E-mail: lucy.liu@fibocom.com
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report Part 27-1 B7.38.41 | Test Report | 1.29 MiB | February 21 2022 / February 22 2022 |
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report Part 27-2 B4.12.13.17.66 | Test Report | 1.85 MiB | February 21 2022 / February 22 2022 |
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report Part 90 B26 | Test Report | 752.90 KiB | February 21 2022 / February 22 2022 |
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Setup Photos | Test Setup Photos | 371.22 KiB | February 21 2022 / August 21 2022 | delayed release |
1 2 3 4 5 | confidentiality letter | Cover Letter(s) | 131.90 KiB | February 21 2022 / February 22 2022 |
Fibocom Wireless Inc. 1101, Tower A, Building 6, Shenzhen International Innovation Valley, Dashi 1st Rd, Nanshan, Shenzhen, China. Date: February 20, 2022 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road - Gate A Columbia, Maryland 21046 Parts List Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: ZMOL850GLL To Whom It May Concern, Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of Commissions rules (47CFR0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachments as confidential document from public disclosure indefinitely. Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. In additional to above mentioned documents, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commission s policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFT 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the following attachments until 180 days after the Grant Date of Equipment Authorizations. It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Regards, Test Setup Photos Internal Photos Lucy Liu / Certification Manager Fibocom Wireless Inc. Tel.: +86-755-26525092 E-mail: lucy.liu@fibocom.com
1 2 3 4 5 | Class II Permissive Change | Cover Letter(s) | 40.69 KiB | October 21 2020 / October 26 2020 |
ireless Inc. Floor 10~14th, Tower A, Building 6,Shenzhen International Innovation Valley, Dashi 1st Rd, Nanshan, Shenzhen, China(Peoples Republic Of) Uo MES -L OME LoB-t VAT oO ye +86-755-26520841 Federal Communications Commission Oe Rom trial gy ae ale] Technology Laboratory Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 S16) 33/ 58 PO om Ten Cit Change for FCC ID: ZMOL8S50GLL, Model: L850-GL The product has been granted by FCC dated 01/31/2019 under FCC ID:
ZMOL850GLL. The intention of this application is to enable the modular granted under FCC ID: ZMOL8S0GLL to be integrated in Lenovo Notebook Computer, Model: TP00123A. We declare that the embedded software of module, FCC ID: ZMOL8S0GLL will disable LTE B38 Operation permanently when sold in United States. LTE B38 operation will not enab led/overridden by end users via Ua Moderatto ollie fol ata et each NT compliance, please refer to the tune-up procedure in this ihre Lucy Liu lucy.liu@fibocom.com
1 2 3 4 5 | Confidentiality Request Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 48.76 KiB | October 21 2020 / October 26 2020 |
Fibocom _ireless Inc. Floor 10~14th,Tower A, Building 6,Shenzhen International Innovation CICA m Rae META T ap Shenzhen, China(Peoples Republic Of) Tel: +86 186 88753460 ; Fax: +86-755-26520841 Date: October 21, 2020 Lucy Liu lucy.liu@fibocom.com Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: ZMOL850GLL To Whom It May Concern, Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of Commissions rules (47CFR0.457, Oe SEM elitr ad Raich the following attachment(s) as confidential document from public disclosure indefinitely Operational Description Tune-up Procedure Above mentioned document contains ole TTeM-Vel ltstys description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. In additional to above mentioned documents, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 fe) day) Commission s policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFT 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR Pas WO AULT T a aT Meir a TPCT ce aT Te information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the rol OTT -ReLaeLoa Teal Tale tS Bielg eee Clee amore tve Mt Malo entree by Wey a fotee External Photos Internal Photos Test Setup Photos OE eTaa ETE) It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for oC me ecm tetas) i equipment authorization is issued. Best Regards, Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609
1 2 3 4 5 | Power of Attorney Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 74.78 KiB | October 14 2020 / October 26 2020 |
Floor 10~14th,Tower A, Building 6,Shenzhen International Innovation Valley, Dashi 1st Rd, Nanshan, Fibocom Wireless Inc. Shenzhen, China Tel: +86 18688753460; Fax: +86-755-26520841 Date: October 12, 2020 To whom it may concern, Please be notified that I, Lucy Liu , have designated Jones Tsai in Sporton International Inc. as the person being responsible for this project and to sign the form 731 and other documentation. Any and all acts carried out by Jones Tsai in Sporton International Inc. on the matters of relating to all processes required in the FCC approval and any communication needed with the national authority, shall have the same legal authority as acts on our own behalf. We further certify that neither the applicant nor any party to this application, as defined in 47 CFR Ch. 1.2002 (b), is subject to a denial to Federal benefits, that include FCC benefits, pursuant to section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1998, 21 U.S.C. 862. This authorization is limited to the product of as following:
FCC ID: ZMOL850GLL Sincerely yours, Lucy Liu Fibocom Wireless Inc. E-mail: lucy.liu@fibocom.com
1 2 3 4 5 | Tsup RFExp | Test Setup Photos | 110.66 KiB | October 14 2020 / April 24 2021 | delayed release |
1 2 3 4 5 | Confidentiality Request | Cover Letter(s) | 204.64 KiB | January 10 2020 / January 21 2020 |
Fibocom Wireless Inc. 5/F,Tower A,Technology Building II,1057 Nanhai Ave, 1057 Nanhai Avenue, ShenZhen China 518000 Tel: +8675526733555 ; Fax: +86-755-26520841 Date: December 16, 2019 Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: ZMOL850GLL To Whom It May Concern, Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of Commissions rules (47CFR0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachment(s) as confidential document from public disclosure indefinitely. Operational Description Tune-up Procedure Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. In additional to above mentioned documents, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commission s policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFT 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the following attachment(s) for 180 days after the grant as outlined in Public Notice DA 04-1705. External Photos Internal Photos Test Setup Photos User Manual It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Regards, ______________________ XueShan Huang keith.huang@fibocom.com FIBOCOM
1 2 3 4 5 | Label info (e-label) | Cover Letter(s) | 393.88 KiB | January 10 2020 / January 21 2020 |
FCC/ISED E-Label Information A. Information to be displayed 1. The information that will be displayed on the e-label and information that will remain in the user manual is shown below:
Information FCC number/ISED number FCC logo 15.19 statement (This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.) on E-label Yes Yes No In Manual Yes Yes Yes Images of the e-label screen are provided below:
1 B. Access to the required information on the e-label 1. Users must be able to access the regulatory information without requiring special access codes or permissions, and in all cases the information must be accessible in no more than three steps from a products main or home menu. The actual steps are:
To access the e-label information, do one of the following:
-Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F9.
-Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press Enter or tap the prompt to enter the Startup Interrupt menu. Then, press F9 or tap the Regulatory information option. 2. Instructions must be provided with the product at the time of purchase, in the user manual, operating instructions, packaging material, quick guide pamphlet, etc. Alternatively, a product-
related website is permitted, if a reference (URL) to obtain the website information is provided at the time of purchase in the user manual, operating instructions, packaging material, quick guide pamphlet, etc. 3. Products must not require special accessories or supplemental plug-ins (e.g., the installation of a SIM/USIM card) to access the information. Access to regulatory information must be provided without special codes, accessories, or permissions beyond the normal security protection to unlock the screen, sign-in page, or overall product access. 4. The FCC ID/ISED ID, warning statements, or other information must be displayed electronically in a manner that is clearly legible without the aid of magnification. 5. Both regulatory information and dedicated exclusive application(s) or script(s) must be secured and implemented in a factory-set-
unalterable format. The regulatory information must be capable of being retrieved and displayed locally, and under the control of the end user in possession of the product. The method must be secure, such that the application or script ensures that the regulatory information correctly displayed. C. Labeling for Importation and Purchasing 1. When e-labeling is used, a physical temporary label is also required on the product, or a label No special access codes or permissions are required to go through the above steps beyond entering a user-defined password to protect against unauthorized access to the device. The information to the user is provided in the user manual. The devices do not require special code, accessories or supplemental plug-ins to access the information. Yes, it is clearly legible without the aid of magnification. Yes, it is secured and the user cannot modify it. The FCC logo, FCC ID, ISED ID and model number are present on the product packaging. 2 on the packaging, at the time of importation, marketing, and sales.8 The physical label can be a summary version of the required regulatory information, such that the product can be identified as complying with the FCCs and ISEDs equipment authorization requirements. The information may simply be the FCC ID and ISED ID for products subject to certification. Products imported that are already packaged for sale and have a physical temporary label will satisfy this requirement. However, for products imported in bulk and not packaged individually, it is acceptable to use a temporary removable adhesive label on the product, or temporary or permanent labels on the shipping packaging or protective bags. Any removable adhesive label shall be of a type intended to survive normal shipping and handling. 3
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Appendix A | RF Exposure Info | 1.27 MiB | January 10 2020 / January 21 2020 |
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Appendix B | RF Exposure Info | 1.23 MiB | January 10 2020 / January 21 2020 |
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Appendix C-1 | RF Exposure Info | 5.65 MiB | January 10 2020 / January 21 2020 |
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Appendix C-2 | RF Exposure Info | 2.95 MiB | January 10 2020 / January 21 2020 |
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Setup Photos RF Exp | Test Setup Photos | 124.91 KiB | January 10 2020 / July 19 2020 | delayed release |
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2022-02-22 | 2572.5 ~ 2617.5 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | Class II Permissive Change |
2 | 2020-10-26 | 2502.5 ~ 2567.5 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | |
3 | 2020-01-21 | 2572.5 ~ 2617.5 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | |
4 | 2019-06-18 | 826.4 ~ 846.6 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | |
5 | 2019-01-31 | 1850.7 ~ 1909.3 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | Change in Identification |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 | Effective |
2022-02-22
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
2020-10-26
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
2020-01-21
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
2019-06-18
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
2019-01-31
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Fibocom Wireless Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0020891057
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Physical Address |
1101,Tower A, Building 6, Shenzhen International Innovation Valley, Dashi 1st Rd, Nanshan
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
5/F,Tower A,Technology Building II, 1057 Nanhai Avenue
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
5/F,Tower A,Technology Building II,1057 Nanhai Ave 1057 Nanhai Avenue
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
1101,Tower A, Building 6, Shenzhen International
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
5/F,Tower A,Technology Building II
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
5/F,Tower A,Technology Building II,1057 Nanhai Ave
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
ShenZhen, N/A
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
China
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | TCB Application Email Address |
c******@telefication.com
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
T******@TIMCOENGR.COM
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
t******@timcoengr.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | TCB Scope |
B1: Commercial mobile radio services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 20, 22 (cellular), 24,25 (below 3 GHz) & 27
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Grantee Code |
ZMO
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Equipment Product Code |
L850GLL
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Name |
L**** L******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
X******** H******
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Title |
Certification Manager
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
Regulatory Principal Engineer
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Telephone Number |
+8675********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Fax Number |
+86-7********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
l******@fibocom.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
k******@fibocom.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Firm Name |
BV 7Layers Communications Technology (Shenzhen) Co
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
BV 7Layers Communications Technology
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Name |
L****** L****
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Physical Address |
No.B102, Dazu Chuangxin Mansion, North of Beihuan
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
Shenzhen 518000, Guangdong
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
China
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Telephone Number |
86 75********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
86755********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Fax Number |
86 75********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
86755********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
L******@bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
L******@cn.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Firm Name |
BV 7Layers Communications Technology (Shenzhen) Co
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
BV 7Layers Communications Technology
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Name |
J****** L********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
A**** Q******
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Physical Address |
No.B102, Dazu Chuangxin Mansion, North of Beihuan
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
Shenzhen 518000, Guangdong
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
China
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Telephone Number |
86 75********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
86755********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Fax Number |
86 75********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
86755********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
j******@bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
a******@cn.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | No | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | No | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 08/21/2022 | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | 04/24/2021 | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | 07/19/2020 | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | 12/15/2019 | |||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Equipment Class | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | LTE module | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | LTE Module | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Modular Equipment Type | Single Modular Approval | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Limited Single Modular Approval | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II Permissive Change | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Change in Identification | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Yes | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Grant Comments | Class II Permissive Change : The electrical characteristics identical component replacement as described in the filing Output power is ERP for Part 22, Part 27 and Part 90; EIRP for Part 24.and Part 27. Modular approval: This grant is valid only when the module is sold to OEM integrators and must be installed by the OEM or OEM integrators. The antenna used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users may not be provided with the module installation instructions. OEM integrators and end-users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The maximum antenna gain allowed for use with this device is 5 dBi. This device contains functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories. This filing is only applicable for U.S. operations | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Class II Permissive Change: integration into Lenovo Notebook Computer Model TP00123A. The highest reported SAR for use at the body and simultaneous transmission exposure conditions are 1.19 W/kg and 1.58 W/kg, respectively. Manufacturer: Hong-Bo. Type: PIFA. Main P/N: 00-260274250T. MIMO P/N: 00-260274270T. Manufacturer: Amphenol. Type: PIFA. Main P/N: TKB368-12-000-C. MIMO P/N: TKB364-16-000-C. Limited Modular Approval. Output Power is EIRP and ERP for above and below 1 GHz, respectively. This device supports LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 2, 4 and 66; LTE of 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band 7; LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, and 10 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 5 and 12; LTE of 5, and 10 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 13, 17, and 30; LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, and 15 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band 26; and LTE of 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for TDD LTE Band 41. This device contains functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories; this filing is applicable only for U.S. operations. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Class II Permissive Change: integration into Lenovo Notebook Computer Model TP00109B. The highest reported SAR for use at the body and simultaneous transmission exposure conditions are 1.19 W/kg and 1.59 W/kg, respectively. Limited Modular Approval. Output Power is EIRP and ERP for above and below 1 GHz, respectively. This device supports LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 2, 4 and 66; LTE of 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band 7; LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, and 10 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 5 and 12; LTE of 5, and 10 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 13, 17, and 30; LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, and 15 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band 26; and LTE of 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for TDD LTE Band 41. This device contains functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories; this filing is applicable only for U.S. operations. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Limited Modular Approval . Class II Permissive Change: integration into Lenovo Notebook Computer Model TP00109A. Output Power is EIRP and ERP for above and below 1 GHz, respectively. The highest reported SAR for use at the body and simultaneous transmission exposure conditions are 1.20 W/kg and 1.58 W/kg, respectively. This device supports LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 2, 4 and 66; LTE of 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band 7; LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, and 10 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 5 and 12; LTE of 5, and 10 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Bands 13, 17, and 30; LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, and 15 MHz bandwidth modes for FDD LTE Band 26; and LTE of 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for TDD LTE Band 41. This device contains functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories; this filing is applicable only for U.S. operations. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Output power is ERP for Part 22, Part 27 and Part 90; EIRP for Part 24.and Part 27. Modular approval: This grant is valid only when the module is sold to OEM integrators and must be installed by the OEM or OEM integrators. The antenna used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users may not be provided with the module installation instructions. OEM integrators and end-users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The maximum antenna gain allowed for use with this device is 5 dBi. This device contains functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories. This filing is only applicable for U.S. operations. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Firm Name |
BV 7Layers Communications Technology (Shenzhen) Co
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
Sporton International Inc.
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
Bureau Veritas CPS (H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Name |
E****** Y******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
A******** C********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
K******** L****
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Telephone Number |
86-20******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
88633********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
+886-******** Extension:
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Fax Number |
+886-********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
+886-********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
e******@bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
a******@sporton.com.tw
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
k******@tw.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 22H | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.148 | 0.004 ppm | 4M08F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.152 | 0.004 ppm | 9M00G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 3 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.119 | 0.004 ppm | 9M00W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 4 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.169 | 0.004 ppm | 13M5G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 5 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.137 | 0.004 ppm | 13M5W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 6 | 24E | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.429 | 0.002 ppm | 4M14F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 7 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.236 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 8 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.208 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 9 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.077 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.066 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 11 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.12 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 12 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.106 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 13 | 27 | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.09 | 0.001 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 14 | 27 | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.068 | 0.001 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 15 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.092 | 0.001 ppm | 8M99G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 16 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.077 | 0.001 ppm | 8M99W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 17 | 27 | 1712.4 | 1752.6 | 0.389 | 0.002 ppm | 4M08F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 18 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.228 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 19 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.182 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.179 | 0.006 ppm | 9M00G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 21 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.138 | 0.006 ppm | 9M00W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 22 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.168 | 0.002 ppm | 8M97G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 23 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.147 | 0.002 ppm | 8M97W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 24 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.184 | 0.005 ppm | 9M00G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 25 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.143 | 0.005 ppm | 9M00W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 26 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.164 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 27 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.14 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 28 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.099 | 0.005 ppm | 9M01G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 29 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.074 | 0.005 ppm | 9M00W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 22H | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.148 | 0.004 ppm | 4M08F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 24E | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.429 | 0.002 ppm | 4M14F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 3 | 27 | 1712.4 | 1752.6 | 0.389 | 0.002 ppm | 4M08F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 4 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.152 | 0.004 ppm | 9M00G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 5 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.119 | 0.004 ppm | 9M00W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 6 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.169 | 0.004 ppm | 13M5G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 7 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.137 | 0.004 ppm | 13M5W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 8 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.236 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 9 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.208 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.077 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 11 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.066 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 12 | 27 | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.09 | 0.001 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 13 | 27 | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.068 | 0.001 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 14 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.092 | 0.001 ppm | 8M99G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 15 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.077 | 0.001 ppm | 8M99W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 16 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.228 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 17 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.182 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 18 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.179 | 0.006 ppm | 9M00G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 19 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.138 | 0.006 ppm | 9M00W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.168 | 0.002 ppm | 8M97G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 21 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.147 | 0.002 ppm | 8M97W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 22 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.184 | 0.005 ppm | 9M00G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 23 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.143 | 0.005 ppm | 9M00W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 24 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.164 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 25 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.14 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 26 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.099 | 0.005 ppm | 9M01G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 27 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.074 | 0.005 ppm | 9M00W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 22H | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.148 | 0.004 ppm | 4M08F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 24E | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.429 | 0.002 ppm | 4M14F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 3 | 27 | 1712.4 | 1752.6 | 0.389 | 0.002 ppm | 4M08F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 4 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.152 | 0.004 ppm | 9M00G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 5 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.119 | 0.004 ppm | 9M00W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 6 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.169 | 0.004 ppm | 13M5G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 7 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.137 | 0.004 ppm | 13M5W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 8 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.236 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 9 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.208 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.077 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 11 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.066 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 12 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.12 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 13 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.106 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 14 | 27 | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.09 | 0.001 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 15 | 27 | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.068 | 0.001 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 16 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.092 | 0.001 ppm | 8M99G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 17 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.077 | 0.001 ppm | 8M99W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 18 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.228 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 19 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.182 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.179 | 0.006 ppm | 9M00G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 21 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.138 | 0.006 ppm | 9M00W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 22 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.168 | 0.002 ppm | 8M97G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 23 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.147 | 0.002 ppm | 8M97W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 24 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.184 | 0.005 ppm | 9M00G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 25 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.143 | 0.005 ppm | 9M00W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 26 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.164 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 27 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.14 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 28 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.099 | 0.005 ppm | 9M01G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 29 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.074 | 0.005 ppm | 9M00W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 22H | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.148 | 0.004 ppm | 4M08F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 2 | 24E | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.429 | 0.002 ppm | 4M14F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 3 | 27 | 1712.4 | 1752.6 | 0.389 | 0.002 ppm | 4M08F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 4 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.152 | 0.004 ppm | 9M00G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 5 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.119 | 0.004 ppm | 9M00W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 6 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.169 | 0.004 ppm | 13M5G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 7 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.137 | 0.004 ppm | 13M5W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 8 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.236 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 9 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.208 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.077 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 11 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.066 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 12 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.12 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 13 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.106 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 14 | 27 | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.09 | 0.001 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 15 | 27 | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.068 | 0.001 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 16 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.092 | 0.001 ppm | 8M99G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 17 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.077 | 0.001 ppm | 8M99W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 18 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.228 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 19 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.182 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 2 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.179 | 0.006 ppm | 9M00G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 21 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.138 | 0.006 ppm | 9M00W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 22 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.168 | 0.002 ppm | 8M97G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 23 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.147 | 0.002 ppm | 8M97W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 24 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.184 | 0.005 ppm | 9M00G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 25 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.143 | 0.005 ppm | 9M00W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 26 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.164 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 27 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.14 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 28 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.099 | 0.005 ppm | 9M01G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 29 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.074 | 0.005 ppm | 9M00W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 1 | 22H | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.148 | 0.004 ppm | 4M08F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 2 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.152 | 0.004 ppm | 9M00G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 3 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.119 | 0.004 ppm | 9M00W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 4 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.169 | 0.004 ppm | 13M5G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 5 | 22H | 824.7 | 848.3 | 0.137 | 0.004 ppm | 13M5W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 6 | 24E | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.429 | 0.002 ppm | 4M14F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 7 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.236 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 8 | 24E | 1850.7 | 1909.3 | 0.208 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 9 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.077 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 1 | 27 | 2502.5 | 2567.5 | 0.066 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 11 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.12 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 12 | 27 | 2572.5 | 2617.5 | 0.106 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 13 | 27 | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.09 | 0.001 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 14 | 27 | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 0.068 | 0.001 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 15 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.092 | 0.001 ppm | 8M99G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 16 | 27 | 2307.5 | 2312.5 | 0.077 | 0.001 ppm | 8M99W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 17 | 27 | 1712.4 | 1752.6 | 0.389 | 0.002 ppm | 4M08F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 18 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.228 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 19 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1754.3 | 0.182 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 2 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.179 | 0.006 ppm | 9M00G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 21 | 27 | 699.7 | 715.3 | 0.138 | 0.006 ppm | 9M00W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 22 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.168 | 0.002 ppm | 8M97G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 23 | 27 | 779.5 | 784.5 | 0.147 | 0.002 ppm | 8M97W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 24 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.184 | 0.005 ppm | 9M00G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 25 | 27 | 706.5 | 713.5 | 0.143 | 0.005 ppm | 9M00W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 26 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.164 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 27 | 27 | 1710.7 | 1779.3 | 0.14 | 0.002 ppm | 18M0W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 28 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.099 | 0.005 ppm | 9M01G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 29 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.074 | 0.005 ppm | 9M00W7D |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC